Bmw 2010 535I Gran Turismo Owners Manual
2010-5seriesgranturismo 2010-5seriesgranturismo
2015-04-13
: Bmw Bmw-2010-535I-Gran-Turismo-Owners-Manual-694536 bmw-2010-535i-gran-turismo-owners-manual-694536 bmw pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 277 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- At a glance
- Controls
- Driving tips
- Navigation
- Entertainment
- Communication
- Mobility
- Reference
535i
550i
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
© 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
English III/10, 03 10 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 266.
Using this Owner's Manual
6Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
19 iDrive
25 Voice activation system
27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
32 Opening and closing
48 Adjusting
61 Transporting children safely
65 Driving
75 Displays
86 Lamps
90 Safety
101 Driving stability control systems
107 Driving comfort
128 Climate control
134 Interior equipment
140 Storage compartments
Driving tips
146 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
154 Navigation
Entertainment
172 Tone
174 Radio
181 CD/multimedia
196 Rear entertainment
Communication
204 Telephone
213 Contacts
216 BMW Assist
Mobility
224 Refueling
226 Fuel
227 Wheels and tires
234 Engine compartment
236 Engine oil
238 Maintenance
240 Replacing components
246 Breakdown assistance
251 Care
Reference
256 Technical data
259 Short commands for voice activation
system
266 Everything from A to Z
Seite 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific
equipment and optional accessories, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Recommends that you study the relevant
section of this Owner's Manual in connection
with a particular part or assembly.
Your individual vehicle
You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi‐
vidualized equipment and features.
This Owner's Manual describes the entire array
of options and equipment available for a specific
model.
As a result, the manual may contain accessories
and equipment that you may not have specified
for your own vehicle.
All options and special equipment are marked
with an asterisk *.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
tions.
Status at publication
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
Seite 6
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Notes
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends using parts and accessories
approved by BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐
ine BMW parts and accessories, other products
approved by BMW and related qualified advice.
BMW has tested these products for safety and
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
BMW can assume responsibility for them. How‐
ever, we cannot assume any responsibility
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
not been specifically approved by BMW.
BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable
when country-specific government approval
has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail
to embrace the entire range of potential operat‐
ing conditions to which components might be
exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products
could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's
own stringent quality standards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷New Vehicle Limited Warranty
▷Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
▷Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
Seite 7
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
▷California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada,
ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks
Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
Seite 8
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Notes
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Cockpit
All around the steering wheel
1Seating comfort functions*
Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem‐
ory* 57
Active seat* 50
2Roller sunblinds* 45
3Safety switch for the rear windows and roller
sunblinds* 45
4Power windows 44
5Exterior mirror operation 58
6Driver assistance systems*
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion* 98
Collision warning* 112
Lane departure warning* 97
Night Vision with pedestrian de‐
tection* 123
Head-up Display* 126
7Lamps
Front fog lamps 89
Parking lamps 86
Low beams 86
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol* 87
Daytime running lights* 87
High-beam Assistant* 88
Instrument lighting 89
8Steering column stalk, left
Seite 12
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Cockpit
Turn signal 70
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 70
High-beam Assistant* 88
Roadside parking lamps 87
Computer* 78
9Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed 114, 108
Resume speed 115, 109
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 114, 107
Increase distance* 109
Decrease distance* 108
10 Instrument cluster 14
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation* 25
Telephone* 204
12 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 70
Rain sensor* 71
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps* 70
13 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 65
14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating* 60
16 Adjust the steering wheel 60
17 Open the tailgate* 39
18 Unlock the hood
Seite 13
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Instrument cluster
1Fuel gauge 77
2Speedometer
3Indicator/warning lamps 14
4Tachometer 76
5Engine oil temperature 76
6External temperature* 75
7Electronic displays 16
8Miles, trip miles 75
9Clock* 80
10 Reset miles 75
Indicator/warning lamps
Instrument cluster
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐
nition is switched on, and light up briefly in the
process.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Automatic Hold
Front fog lamps*
High beams
Seite 14
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Cockpit
Symbol Function or system
High-beam Assistant*
Parking lamps, headlamp control
Active Cruise Control*
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control*
Cruise control*
Lane departure warning*
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Tire Pressure Monitor
Flat Tire Monitor
Safety belts
Airbag system
Symbol Function or system
Steering system
Engine functions
Brake system
Brake system in Canadian models
Antilock Brake System ABS
Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana‐
dian models
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information on the Control Display,
e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐
quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐
trol, refer to page 83.
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐
matically.
Seite 15
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
All around the center console
1Headliner 18
2Control Display 19
3Glove compartment 140
4Air vent 131
5Hazard warning system 246
Central locking system 38
6Radio 174
CD/Multimedia 181
7Automatic climate control 128
8Controller with buttons 19
9Parking brake 66
Auto Hold 68
10 PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol* 115
Top View* 118
Backup camera* 120
Side View* 122
11 Dynamic Driving Control 103
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 103
12 Transmission selector lever
Seite 17
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
iDrive
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1Control Display
2Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes
▷To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 253.
▷Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1. Turn.
2. Press.
Seite 19
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation map
view.
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
Seite 20
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
iDrive
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷Screen settings, for instance. "Split
screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
Seite 21
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta‐
tus field at the top right:
▷Time.
▷Current entertainment source.
▷Sound output, on/off.
▷Wireless network reception strength.
▷Telephone status.
▷Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Traffic bulletins* switched on. One of
the symbols is displayed.
HD Radio* switched on.
Satellite radio* switched on
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call*
Missed call*
Wireless network reception
strength*. Symbol flashes: network
search
Wireless network not available*
Bluetooth* activated
Roaming* is active
Text message received*
Check SIM card*
SIM card* blocked
SIM card* missing
Enter PIN*
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD* player
Music collection*
Gracenote® database*
AUX-IN port
Rear AUX-IN port*
Rear AUX-IN port on the right*
USB audio interface*
Seite 22
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
iDrive
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions* switched off
Request current vehicle position*
Split screen*
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. "Split screen content"
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
▷To display short information: touch the but‐
ton.
▷To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Seite 23
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters:
Symbol Function
Move the controller up: switch
from upper to lower case letters.
Move the controller up: switch
from lower to upper case letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.
Seite 24
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
iDrive
Voice activation system*
The concept
▷The voice activation system can be used to
operate equipment by means of spoken
commands.
▷The system encompasses special micro‐
phones on the outer edge of the headliner.
▷Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands. The system
prompts you to make your entries.
▷›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐
ual to use with the voice activation system.
Requirements
On the Control Display, set the language to be
used with the voice activation system to enable
the system to identify the voice commands.
Set the language, refer to page 81.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no further commands are available, continue
operating the equipment via the iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis‐
play.
Have the available spoken instructions read
aloud using ›Voice commands‹.
If, for example, ›Settings‹ is selected, the com‐
mands to the settings are read aloud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, irrespec‐
tive of which menu item is currently selected,
e. g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short voice activation commands, refer to
page 259.
Example: playing back a CD
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
5. ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter version of the voice dialog, the
prompts and responses from the system are ab‐
breviated.
Seite 25
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
page 246, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷When selecting a radio station, use the com‐
mon pronunciation of the station name.
▷Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 26
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Voice activation system
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Owner's Manual in the vehicle
The Owner's Manual can be displayed on the
Control Display in accordance with the equip‐
ment selected.
Methods of opening the Owner's
Manual
The following methods are available:
▷Quick reference: "Quick reference"
▷Key word search: "Owner's Manual"
▷Using pictures: "Search by pictures"
1. Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Select "Quick reference", "Search by
pictures" or "Owner's Manual".
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Context-sensitive help - section of the
Owner's Manual referring to the
present function
The relevant information can be opened directly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Man‐
ual.
4. Press the button again to return to the
function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
Seite 27
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23,
and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 28
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1Unlocking
2Locking
3Opening the small tailgate
4Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture, opening the large tailgate*
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal
Profile, refer to page 33.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 238.
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐
trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷Driver's door.
▷Storage compartment in the front center
armrest.
The storage compartment contains a switch for
separately securing the tailgate, refer to
page 41.
Replacing the battery
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
Seite 32
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the
engine in situations such as the following:
▷Remote control malfunction.
▷Interference of radio transmission to remote
control by external sources.
▷Discharged battery in the remote control.
A message is displayed on the Control Display
if an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or
start the engine.
Starting the engine in case of
emergency detection of remote control
If a corresponding message appears on the
Control Display, as shown, hold the remote con‐
trol against the marked area on the steering col‐
umn and press the Start/Stop button within
10 seconds while depressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile
is called up.
▷Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for up to three
remote controls.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function. For more information, contact your
service center.
Transmission takes place via:
▷The USB interface in the glove compart‐
ment onto a USB device.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the one
associated with the remote control currently in
use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
Renaming profiles
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
Seite 33
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 140: "USB
device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the saved
contacts can be exported.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 140: "USB
device"
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Options"
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re‐
fer to page 112.
▷ Exterior mirror position, refer to page 58.
▷ CD/Multimedia, refer to page 181: audio
source listened to last.
▷Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re‐
fer to page 104.
▷ Driver's seat position, refer to page 48.
▷ Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 23: assignment.
▷ Head-up Display, refer to page 126: selec‐
tion, brightness and position of display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 86: time setting.
▷ Tone, refer to page 172: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control, refer to
page 128: settings.
▷ Steering wheel position, refer to page 60
▷ Navigation, refer to page 154: map views,
route criteria, voice output on/off.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer
to page 123: selection of functions and type
of display.
Seite 34
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
▷ Daytime running lights*, refer to page 87:
current setting.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC, refer to
page 173: adjusting the signal tone volume.
▷ Radio, refer to page 174: stored stations,
station listened to last, special settings.
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 120: selec‐
tion of functions and type of display.
▷ Side View, refer to page 122: selection of
the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer to
page 81.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 97:
last setting, on/off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 98: last setting, on/off.
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 70.
▷ Locking the vehicle, refer to page 38: after
a brief period or after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷Doors.
▷Tailgate.
▷Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷Via the remote control.
▷Via the driver's door lock.
▷Via the door handles*.
▷Via the button on the tailgate*.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷Anti-theft protection is switched on/off.
Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock
buttons or the door opener.
▷The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps* are switched on and off.
▷The alarm system*, refer to page 42, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing: from the
outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button.
The vehicle is unlocked.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Seite 35
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷"Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷"All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof*.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows and the glass sunroof* open.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps,
courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration, refer to page 86, can be set in
the Control Display.
Opening the tailgate
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
The small tailgate opens slightly.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
With automatic trunk lid operation*:
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release.
The large tailgate opens automatically.
Note the opening height of the large tail‐
gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when
the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it was
previously locked or unlocked.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the trunk. The
tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed
closed.
Provide edge protection
Seite 36
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window
while driving and damage the heating wires of
the rear window. Provide edge protection.◀
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷"Flash when lock/unlock"
Malfunction
Local radio waves may interfere with the remote
control.
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery is
discharged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 32.
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the
door lock using the key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷LX8766S.
▷LX8766E.
▷LX8CAS.
▷LX8CAS2.
▷MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
key.◀
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system*, refer to page 42, is triggered if the
vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control to
switch off the alarm.
Convenient operation*
The door lock can be used to simultaneously
operate the windows and the glass sunroof*.
Seite 37
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Opening/closing
With the door closed, turn the key to the Unlock
or Lock position and hold it there.
Turning the key back to the original position
stops the motion.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped; otherwise, injuries
may result.◀
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock
the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the
driver's door.
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Locking and unlocking
Press the button in the vehicle.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or
unlocked when the front doors are closed, but
they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
You can set how the vehicle should be unlocked;
refer to Unlocking, refer to page 35.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷"Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷"Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Tailgate
Opening
Opening the small tailgate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Seite 38
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
▷Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 1.
▷Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
▷Push the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, provided that the tailgate has not
been locked.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Opening the large tailgate
Note the opening height of the large tail‐
gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when
the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 2, and
open the tailgate.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Closing
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only.
It is closed automatically.
Locking the vehicle*
Press the button on the open tailgate.
The vehicle is locked completely.
Automatic trunk lid operation*
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the large tailgate should
open.
Seite 39
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Adjusting the opening height
When setting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm
above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling may
not be high enough for the open tailgate if the
load situation changes.◀
1. "Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired opening
height is selected.
Opening the large tailgate
Note the opening height of the large tail‐
gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when
the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may
result.
Adjust the opening height of the large tailgate
according to the given situation.◀
The large tailgate opens automatically to the ad‐
justed opening height.
▷Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate, arrow 2.
▷Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second and re‐
lease.
Pressing the button again stops the motion.
The opening process is interrupted as well:
▷When the vehicle starts moving.
▷By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
▷By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Opening the large tailgate further
Press and hold the button on the inside of the
large tailgate, arrow 2, to open the large tailgate
to the maximum opening height.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Closing the large tailgate
▷Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the large tailgate.
The tailgate closes automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Seite 40
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
▷With Comfort Access:
Press the button on the open tailgate.
Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐
cle is locked.
▷Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate, arrow 2.
Pressing again stops the motion.
The closing process is not interrupted when the
vehicle starts moving.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate
the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and
smooth motion.
Locking separately
The tailgate can be locked separately, using the
switch in the front center armrest.
▷The tailgate is locked, ar‐
row 1.
The small and large tailgates
are locked.
▷The tailgate is unlocked, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the tailgate and disconnects it from the
central locking system.
When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate
cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the
vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra‐
red remote control can be handed out without
the key.
Emergency unlocking*
Pull the handle inside the trunk.
The tailgate is unlocked.
Comfort Access*
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷Starting the engine.
Functional requirements
▷To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
Seite 41
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access.
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the middle button on the exterior of the
tailgate, refer to page 38, to open the small tail‐
gate.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Press the right-hand button on the exterior of
the tailgate to open the large tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Ignition on
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on.
When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal;
otherwise, the engine will start.
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from local radio waves,
e.g., mobile phones.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use a key in the
door lock.
To subsequently start the engine, hold the re‐
mote control against the marked area on the
steering column, refer to page 33.
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 43.
▷Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Seite 42
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some country-specific versions.
This alarm can only be ended by pressing the
button on the remote control.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
▷Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
The small tailgate opens slightly.
▷With automatic trunk lid operation*:
Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second and release.
The large tailgate opens automatically.
Note the opening height of the large tail‐
gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when
the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again by the alarm system. The hazard
warning system flashes once.
Panic mode*
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off the alarm
▷Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
▷Unlock the vehicle via the driver's door lock
using the key*.
▷With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the
remote control with you, pull on the door
handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
continuously. The interior motion sensor is
not active.
▷The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine is started, but no longer than
approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷In duplex garages.
▷During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
Seite 43
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
twice in succession.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then flashes continuously.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Closing
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make sure that
the closing path of the window is clear; other‐
wise, injuries may result.◀
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via the
remote control or the door lock.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Seite 44
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
Safety switch
The following functions can be locked simulta‐
neously, using the switch:
▷Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear.
▷Operation of the roller sunblinds* using the
switches in the rear.
▷Adjustment of the power rear seats*.
▷Adjustment of the power head restraints* in
the rear.
Switching on and off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
To deactivate the function, the vehicle must be
in at least the radio ready state.
Roller sunblinds*
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from op‐
erating the roller blinds using the switches in the
rear.
Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The
LED lights up if the safety function is switched
on.
If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds
after having activated them consecutively a
number of times, the system is blocked for a
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐
terior temperatures.
Driver's door controls
Roller blinds for rear side windows
Press the button.
Rear door controls
Roller blind for the side windows
Press the button.
The roller blind can only be extended or re‐
tracted when the side window is closed.
Raising and lowering the roller blinds
together
Press the button.
Panoramic glass sunroof*
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the same
switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Seite 45
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
selves.◀
Raising the glass sunroof
Press the switch briefly.
▷The closed roof is raised and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷The opened roof closes until
it is in its raised position. The
sliding visor stays completely
open.
Pressing the switch again
closes the sliding visor al‐
most completely.
Sliding visor with raised roof
Do not use force to close the sliding visor,
as this may damage the mechanism.◀
Opening/closing the sliding visor
▷Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
▷Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐
scribed under Sliding visor.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Press the switch twice in the de‐
sired direction past the resist‐
ance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenience operation, refer to page 36, via the
remote control or the door lock.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open.
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐
partment.
Every time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
completely, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the movement by pressing the
switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
raised position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Seite 46
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Opening and closing
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure, it may only be possible to
operate the roof to a limited extent.
Have the system initialized by your service cen‐
ter.
Seite 47
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 90.
Front seats
Adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving.
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀
At a glance: partially powered seats
1Thigh support*
2Tilt
3Forward/backward
4Lumbar support*
5Height
6Backrest
Adjustments in detail: partially
powered seats
Forward/back:
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Seat tilt:
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en‐
gages properly.
Seite 48
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Adjusting
Height:
Move the button in the required direction.
Backrest tilt:
Move the button in the required direction.
At a glance: power* seats
1Lumbar support*
2Backrest width*
3Shoulder support*
4Backrest
5Forward/back, height, tilt
6Thigh support*
Adjustments in detail: power* seats
1. Forward/back.
2. Height.
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
Seite 49
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
5. Thigh support*.
Lumbar support*
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷Press the front/rear section of the switch.
The curvature is increased/decreased.
▷Press the upper/lower section of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Backrest width*
Change the width of the backrest using the side
wings to adjust the lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Shoulder support*
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Active seat*
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
Seat heating*
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
Seite 50
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Adjusting
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution*
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation*
The seat surface is cooled by means of the in‐
tegrated fan.
The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e.g., if the
vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Switching on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Adjusting
At a glance: manually adjustable seats
1Forward/backward
2Backrest
Adjustments in detail: manually
adjustable seats
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the seat while
driving. Otherwise, the restraining effect of the
seat can be limited in an accident.◀
Forward/back:
Seite 51
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the level, move the seat forward
or back slightly until it engages.
Backrest tilt:
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐
rest or lift it off.
At a glance: power* seats
1Forward/backward
2Shoulder support
3Backrest, head restraint
The seats cannot be adjusted if the safety
switch for the power windows has been
pressed.
Adjustments in detail: power* seats
1. Forward/back.
2. Backrest tilt.
3. Head restraint.
Shoulder support*
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷Results in a relaxed seating position.
Seite 52
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Adjusting
▷Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Reset* to standard position
Maintain pressure on the button until the system
completes the adjustment.
Seat heating*
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating rear"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation*
Switching on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Seite 53
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has four or five* seating positions,
each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
▷The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷The two rear safety belt buckles, integrated
into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting
on the left and right.
▷The belt buckle embossed with the word
CENTER is intended exclusively for use by
passengers riding in the center position.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
front passenger seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Seite 54
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Adjusting
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function
▷Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ers.
▷Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷Do not attach accessories to the seat or
head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
▷To raise: pull.
▷To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: power* head
restraints
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to the back of the head:
manual head restraints
▷Forward: pull.
▷Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Seite 55
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Distance to the back of the head:
power* head restraints
The head restraint is automatically repositioned
when the shoulder support is adjusted, refer to
page 50.
Adjusting the side extensions*
Fold forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
▷To raise: pull.
▷To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: power* head
restraints
Move the switch in the desired direction.
Adjusting* the side sections
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
ing position.
Removing: manual head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Seite 56
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Adjusting
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos‐
sible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Removing: power* head restraints
For technical reasons, the head restraint cannot
be removed.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory*
General information
Front
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved for each remote control. The adjustment
of the lumbar support is not stored.
Rear
Two different seat positions can be stored and
retrieved.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button on the door. The
LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button on the door again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat
or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
Seite 57
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷Press a button on the remote control.
▷Press the Start/Stop button.
Calling up with the remote control
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel position selected last is stored for the
currently used remote control.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷When a memory button is touched.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
than the driver's mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
At a glance
1Adjusting
2Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor*
3Fold in and out*
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions*
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 57.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Seite 58
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Adjusting
Automatic Curb Monitor*
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷In car washes.
▷In narrow streets.
▷For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature*
Photocells are used for control:
▷In the mirror glass.
▷On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷Keep the photocells clean.
▷Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Adjusting while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Seite 59
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Power* steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 57.
Steering wheel heating*
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷On: the LED lights up.
▷Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 60
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of the
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐
jury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐
tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 91.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Before mounting
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system
on the rear middle seat, return both outer backr‐
ests to the basic position.
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
In the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the middle po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.
Backrest width*
Before installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, open the backrest
Seite 61
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
width, refer to page 50, completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
up a memory position.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be re‐
duced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated behind the seat cover between the back‐
rest and the seat cushion at the marked loca‐
tions.
Exposing the lower LATCH anchors
1. Reach between the seat cushion and the
backrest.
2. Detach the seat cover from the Velcro® fas‐
tener.
Seite 62
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Transporting children safely
3. Pull the seat cover forward.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
straint fixing system.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems without power rear seats
1. Move the seat to its rearmost position.
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
back slightly.
3. Fold the leather cover on the seat forward.
4. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
5. Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
have properly engaged and that the child re‐
straint fixing system is resting snugly
against the backrest.
6. After mounting the system, move the back‐
rest back up slightly so that the child re‐
straint fixing system rests against the back‐
rest.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems on power rear seats*
1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 53.
2. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
3. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing systems with a
tether strap
Mounting points
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are
two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Fold up the middle mounting point.
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.◀
1Direction of travel
2Head restraint.
3Hook for upper retaining strap
4Mounting point/eye
Seite 63
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
5Seat backrest
6Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Raise the head restraint.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the
mounting eyes.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
5. Lower the head restraint.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to
page 45.
Seite 64
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Transporting children safely
Driving
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake
pedal is pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button and do not press on
the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷During locking when the low beams are
switched on.
▷Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷When the engine is switched off and the ig‐
nition is switched on, the system automati‐
cally switches to radio ready state when the
door is opened, if the light is switched off or
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system, the ignition switches off auto‐
matically.
Radio ready state
This state can only be reached by pressing the
Start/Stop button briefly to switch off the engine
while it is running.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
Radio ready state switches off automatically:
▷After approx. 8 minutes.
▷When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
set the parking brake and place the transmission
in position P or neutral to prevent the car from
moving.◀
Frequent starting in quick succession
Seite 65
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting the car
and avoid starting the car frequently in quick
succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or
is inadequately burned, and there is the danger
of overheating and damaging the catalytic con‐
verter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐
erate engine speeds.
Starting the engine
Press on the brake pedal and
press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is cranked until it
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the windows and injure them‐
selves.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
Switching off the engine
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll when the following
steps are adhered to:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake or deactivate Au‐
tomatic Hold, refer to page 68.
4. Switch the engine off.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷When the ignition is switched off.
▷After approx. 15 minutes if the vehicle is not
moved.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
▷Engine switched off: the parking brake acts
on the rear wheels.
▷Engine running: the parking brake acts on
the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels
via the hydraulic brake system.
The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐
matically:
▷Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.
▷Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 68.
Seite 66
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up in red. The
parking brake is set.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
While driving
Use while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lamps light up.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing
Press the switch while the brake pedal is
pressed or transmission position P is en‐
gaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Manual release
The parking brake can be released manually in
the event of a power failure or electrical fault.
Before releasing, secure the vehicle
against rolling
Before releasing the parking brake manually,
and whenever you park the vehicle with the
parking brake released, ensure that position P of
the automatic transmission is engaged.
Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to
the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel
chock; otherwise, there is the danger of the ve‐
hicle rolling.◀
If it also becomes necessary to release the
transmission lock of the automatic transmission
manually, follow this sequence:
1. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
2. Manually release the parking brake.
Unlocking
1. Raise the rear floor cover in the trunk, ar‐
row 1, and fasten it with a retaining strap.
2. Remove the release tool from the tool kit.
3. Take out the floor trim in the trunk, removing
the clips with a screw driver, arrows.
Seite 67
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Hook the release tool into the release point,
arrow.
5. Forcefully pull the release tool up against the
resistance until you notice a marked in‐
crease in the resistance and the parking
brake releases audibly.
Have the malfunction corrected
If the parking brake has been released
manually in response to a malfunction, only
technicians can return it to operation.
Have the malfunction corrected by your service
center.◀
After a power failure
Only put the parking brake into operation
after a power failure
The parking brake should only be put into oper‐
ation again if it was manually released due to an
interruption in the supply of electrical power.
Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking
brake will function properly.◀
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the switch with the brake de‐
pressed or transmission position P en‐
gaged.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the parking brake, such as
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically and
the parking brake is set when:
▷The engine is switched off.
▷A door is opened and the driver's safety belt
is unbuckled.
▷The vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
parking brake while driving.
Seite 68
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving
The indicator lamp switches from green
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving away:
▷Release the parking brake manually.
▷Reactivate Automatic Hold.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake, refer to page 66, is set
manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐
matically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling when it stops.
The indicator lamp lights up in green.
Press on the accelerator to drive away.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Before driving into a car wash
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the engine
is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
The parking brake can also be released
after the engine is switched off, e.g., in a
car wash.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
it.
Seite 69
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷High beams, arrow 1.
▷Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
damaged.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Seite 70
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷Brief wipe: press down once.
▷To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
The time between wipes is controlled automat‐
ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
Press the button on the wiper lever.
When activated, the wipers move over the wind‐
shield once.
The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀
Rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumb wheel.
Washing the windshield, headlamps
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated*
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Seite 71
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system, refer to page 70, must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
it away from sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Container for washer fluid
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
ommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Capacity
approx. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 65, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷After the engine is switched off, if the car is
in radio ready state, refer to page 65, or if the
Seite 72
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving
ignition is switched off, refer to page 65, and
if position R or D is engaged.
▷If the ignition is switched off and position N
is engaged.
▷If the vehicle is standing with position R or D
engaged and you unfasten the belt of the
driver's seat and open the driver's door.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv‐
ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Press the Unlock button to:
▷Engage R.
▷Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Seite 73
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Activating the M/S manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
▷To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument panel, followed by the current gear.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, e.g., P.
Seite 74
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving
Displays
Instrument cluster
At a glance
1Fuel gauge
2Speedometer
3Indicator/warning lamps
4Tachometer
5Oil temperature
6External temperature*
7Electronic displays
8Miles, trip miles
9Clock*
10 Display/reset miles
Odometer and trip odometer
▷Odometer, arrow 1.
▷Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Press the knob.
▷When the ignition is switched
off, the time, external temper‐
ature and odometer are dis‐
played.
▷When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/
+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A message is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
There is the increased danger of
ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Seite 75
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format,
refer to page 80.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Setting the date and date format,
refer to page 80.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted
to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be‐
come too hot, a warning message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 237.
Engine oil temperature
▷Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐
perature end. Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷Normal operating temperature: the pointer
is in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐
perature display.
▷Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
diately and allow it to cool down.
Check the oil level, refer to page 236.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driving
in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consumption
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 76
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Displays
Energy regeneration
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle is converted to electrical en‐
ergy while coasting, refer to
page 151. The vehicle battery is
partially charged and fuel con‐
sumption can be lowered.
Fuel gauge
Gasoline engine:
Fuel capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters
The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 224.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷A message appears briefly.
▷The remaining range is
shown on the computer.
The message appears continuously below a
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/
50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the cruising range is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following functions can be operated using
the buttons and the thumb wheel on the steering
wheel and the display in the instrument cluster:
▷Current audio source.
▷Redial on telephone*.
▷Activation of the voice activation system*.
Seite 77
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Activating a list and creating the
setting
Press a button on the right side of the steering
wheel or turn the thumb wheel to activate the
required list.
Create the setting using the thumb wheel.
Computer
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever displays
the information on the info dis‐
play in the following order:
▷Range.
▷Average fuel consumption.
▷Average speed.
▷Date*.
▷Speed Limit Display*.
▷Time of arrival*
After entering the distance or when desti‐
nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐
tion system.
▷Distance to destination*
After entering the distance or when desti‐
nation guidance is activated in the naviga‐
tion system.
▷Arrow view of navigation system*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the com‐
puter is to be displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/
5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
Seite 78
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Displays
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Resetting values
The average fuel consumption and average
speed can be reset.
Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Trip computer
There are two types of computer.
▷"Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷"Trip computer": the values provide an over‐
view of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
Seite 79
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. "Cons." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Seite 80
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Displays
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
To switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
Seite 81
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Service requirements
Display
The driving distance or the time
to the next service is displayed
briefly after the ignition is
switched on.
The current service require‐
ments can be read out from the remote control
by the service specialist.
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re‐
quest, refer to page 217.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching. Please make a
service appointment.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1. "Vehicle Info"
Seite 82
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Displays
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Create the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display*.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information on the Control Display,
e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐
quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐
trol.
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐
matically.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
Seite 83
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis‐
played again after the ignition is switched off.
Speed limit detection*
The concept
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐
mum allowable speed in the instrument cluster.
The camera at the base of the interior rearview
mirror monitors traffic signs at the edge of the
road and uses the information from the naviga‐
tion system.
In this way, the allowable speed is displayed
even in the absence of traffic signs, such as
within town limits.
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion.
Speed limit detection assists the driver and does
not replace the human eye.◀
Switching on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be
displayed on the info display in the instrument
cluster via the computer.
Display
The following is displayed in the
instrument cluster:
▷Current speed limit.
▷No speed limit - for the Ger‐
man autobahn.
▷Speed limit detection is not available.
Information regarding speed limit detection can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display, refer
to page 126.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
▷In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷When signs are concealed by objects.
▷When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷When driving toward bright lights.
Seite 84
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Displays
▷When the windshield is fogged over, dirty or
covered by a sticker, etc., in front of the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
▷In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷When roads differ from the navigation, e.g.
due to changes in the road network.
▷When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior
rearview mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Seite 85
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Lamps
At a glance
1Rear fog lamps*
2Front fog lamps
3Automatic headlamp control/adaptive light
control*/High-beam Assistant*/welcome
lamps
4Lamps off/daytime running lights*
5Parking lamps
6Low beams/welcome lamps
7Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 87.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating the welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
Seite 86
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Lamps
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights*
The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
tion 0, and . After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Adaptive light control*
The concept
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, such as on mountainous roads
or when turning, turning lamps that light up the
inside area of the curve are switched on at
speeds up to approx. 70 km/h, approx. 44 mph.
Controls
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
Seite 87
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive
light control directs light towards the front pas‐
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active and illuminates the outside of the curve.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the
light distribution to the contours of the road.
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to
avoid blinding oncoming traffic and raised in de‐
pressions to increase visibility.
Malfunction
A message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
High-beam assistant*
The concept
When the lights are switched on, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the high-beam assistant
1. Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati‐
cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷High beams on, arrow 1.
▷High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
To reactivate the high-beam assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
Seite 88
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Lamps
▷In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
▷In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷At low speeds.
▷When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior
rearview mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 87, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Cornering lamp*
In the switch position, a cornering lamp is
switched on for a broader light distribution at
speeds up to 68 mph/110 km/h.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust the
brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumb wheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumb wheel for the instrument
lighting.
1Interior lamps
2Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: press the button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
Seite 89
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Safety
Airbags
1Front airbag, driver
2Front airbag, front passenger
3Head airbags
4Side airbag
5Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
body on the side in the chest area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs during a fron‐
tal collision.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
▷There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Seite 90
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Safety
▷Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
ments and mobile phones.
▷Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions
under Children on the front passenger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically recommended by
the manufacturer of your vehicle.
▷Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Seite 91
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Most child seats are detected by the system,
especially the child seats required by the
NHTSA at the time the vehicle was manufac‐
tured. After installing a child seat, make sure that
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up. This indicates that the child seat
has been detected and the front passenger air‐
bags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the
position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
damage to objects.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
Monitoring of the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Conditions for operation
The system must have been reset when the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use
wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the
system will operate properly. Reset the system
after each correction of the tire inflation pres‐
sure and after every tire or wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Seite 92
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Safety
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external
influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
▷For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐
ics.
▷When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only necessary if indicated by
TPM.
Green
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
state.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
▷A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
▷The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for
this may be:
▷TPM is being reset.
▷Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency.
▷Malfunction.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset TPM"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
setting process is completed automatically dur‐
ing driving. The tires are shown in green and
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically.
If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are
displayed in yellow.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Dis‐
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
▷There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to below
50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 93
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
Continued driving with a flat tire
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
▷With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐
gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km.
▷With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or
4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/
80 km.
▷With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Message when not reset
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The system was not reset, e.g., after a wheel
change.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires are
displayed in gray on the Control Display.
No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷Malfunction: have the system checked.
▷A wheel without wheel electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary.
▷Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the disturbance, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
Seite 94
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Safety
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating prop‐
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then re‐
main continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The system detects a pressure loss on the basis
of speed differences between the individual
wheels while driving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
not be detected.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷When the system has not been initialized.
▷When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration.
▷When driving with snow chains*.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains*.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
Seite 95
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp and the vehicle
symbol light up. A message appears on
the Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires* or run-flat tires*.
Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐
bol containing the letters RSC marked on
the tire sidewall.
Normal tires*
1. Identify the damaged wheel.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Run-flat tires*
1. Carefully reduce your speed to a maximum
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving without run-
flat tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driv‐
ing may result in serious accidents.◀
2. Repair the puncture.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
▷With a light load: 1 to 2 people without lug‐
gage: approx. 90 miles/150 km.
▷With a medium load: 2 people, trunk full, or
4 people without luggage: approx. 50 miles/
80 km.
▷With a full load: 4 people, trunk full: approx.
30 miles/50 km.
If there is minor tire damage, especially on the
tire tread, the distance that you can travel with
the damaged tire can be extended.
After notification, inflate the damaged tire to a
maximum of 3.5 bar at the next opportunity.
Do not reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. The ex‐
isting flat tire notification will continue to act as
a reminder of the defective tire. The procedure
can be repeated several times.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 96
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Safety
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Lane departure warning*
The concept
This system issues a warning at speeds above
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about
to leave the lane on roads with lane lines.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷On: the LED lights up.
▷Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
▷Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated.
▷Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane line was
detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane line has been
detected, the steering wheel begins vibrating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷When returning to your own lane.
▷When braking hard.
▷When using the turn signal.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course
of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lines such as in con‐
struction areas.
▷When lane lines are covered in snow, ice, dirt
or water.
▷In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Seite 97
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷When the lines are covered by objects.
▷When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷When driving toward bright lights.
▷When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Malfunctions
Steering wheel vibration
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
tion causes the system to overheat.
This causes the lane departure warning to be‐
come deactivated.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior
rearview mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Active Blind Spot Detection*
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐
itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up
dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷On: the LED lights up.
▷Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 98
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Safety
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐
ical zone.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi‐
cle.◀
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations:
▷When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Malfunctions
Steering wheel vibration
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
tion causes the system to overheat.
This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be‐
come deactivated.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷Dirty or icy bumper.
▷Stickers on the bumper.
A message is displayed when the system is not
fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Seite 99
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Brake force display*
The concept
▷During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 100
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to
page 112.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Deactivating/activating the DSC OFF
program
The program can be deactivated/activated via
Dynamic Driving Control, refer to page 103.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷When driving with snow chains.
Seite 101
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
The system can be deactivated/activated via the
TRACTION and SPORT+ programs of the Dy‐
namic Driving Control, refer to page 103.
Dynamic Drive*
The concept
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
creased under all driving conditions. The system
utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear
axles that react immediately to all driving situa‐
tions.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
ing Control, refer to page 103.
SPORT
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
NORMAL
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control*
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers three different programs.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
ing Control, refer to page 103.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
NORMAL
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and
SPORT programs.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering*
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment as a function of the speed.
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,
in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,
steering becomes more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a
direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐
ingly reduced.
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as
the front wheels.
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can
specifically steer the front and rear wheels to
stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes,
e.g., when braking where road conditions differ
on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐
alize the Integral Active Steering.
The warning lamp lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display.
1. With the engine running, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left and right several
Seite 102
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving stability control systems
times in a uniform manner until the warning
lamp disappears.
2. Have the system checked if the warning
lamp does not go out after moving the steer‐
ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering
wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains
Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated
when using snow chains, refer to page 233.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
ing Control, refer to page 103.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active
Steering for greater driving agility.
NORMAL
Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering
for optimal traveling comfort.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Self-leveling suspension
The concept
The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle
height and ground clearance constant. The
height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐
tained at a predefined level under all load con‐
ditions.
The system ensures consistent comfort by
keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐
uations.
Malfunction
A message appears on the Control Display. A
malfunction has occurred in the self-leveling
suspension. Vehicle handling may be altered
and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced.
Visit your nearest service center.
Dynamic Driving Control*
The concept
Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust
the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro‐
grams are available for this purpose; they can be
activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control
buttons.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
NORMAL
COMFORT*
For Dynamic Damper Control*, the lower button
is labeled with COMFORT.
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to NORMAL
in the following situations:
▷Failure of Integral Active Steering*.
▷Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*.
▷The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Seite 103
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering* system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC OFF
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in
the tachometer.
The DSC system is switched off.
Deactivating DSC OFF
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the tachom‐
eter.
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed
in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension during limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in‐
strument cluster.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for
greater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 105, the sport program
can be set to individual specifications.
Seite 104
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving stability control systems
After the sport program is activated, select
"Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed
panel and configure the program.
Optionally, the sport program can be configured
before it is activated:
1. "Settings"
2. "SPORT mode"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when the sport
program is activated.
NORMAL
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
Activating NORMAL
Press the button repeatedly until the
program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 103.
COMFORT*
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort with maximum
driving stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT appears in the tachometer.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list of the select‐
able programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
Seite 105
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. "Display driving settings"
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.◀
Seite 106
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving stability control systems
Driving comfort
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC*
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automatically
adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of
you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives
away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to
accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the
desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
Buttons at a glance
1System on/off, interrupt
2Resume speed
3Store speed*
4Increase distance
5Store, maintain/change speed
6Reduce distance
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the marking in the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control, refer to page 101, is
switched on as well, if necessary.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Seite 107
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Press the button.
▷If active: press twice.
▷If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷The brakes are applied.
▷Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷The safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing.
▷The system has not detected objects for an
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐
tle traffic without road edge line markings.
▷The radar sensor is dirty.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 109.
Maintaining, storing or changing the
speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐
rent speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Speed differences
Great speed differences with vehicles
driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap‐
proaching a truck or when another vehicle
swerves into your own lane, cannot be compen‐
sated for by the system.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/
1 km/h.
▷Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed:
110 mph/180 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traffic
and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the
prescribed safety distance.◀
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Seite 108
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷When the system is switched off.
▷When the ignition is switched off.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, engage position P of the automatic
transmission and apply the parking brake. Oth‐
erwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
▷The vehicle was braked to a halt by the sys‐
tem.
When the marking in the speedometer is or‐
ange:
The vehicle ahead of you drives away: to ac‐
celerate, press on the accelerator briefly, or
press the RES button or the rocker switch.
The marking turns green again and your ve‐
hicle follows the vehicle ahead of you.
Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that
the vehicle ahead of you has driven off.
▷You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by
pressing on the brake pedal and it is stand‐
ing behind another vehicle:
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
RES button or the rocker switch when the
vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1Display of desired speed
2Distance to vehicle ahead of you
3Vehicle symbol
4Brief status display
Desired speed
Marking in the speedometer
▷The marking lights up in
green: the system is active.
▷The marking lights up in or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the system
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Seite 109
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up in orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for op‐
erating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐
tion when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you
can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of a
traffic congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
▷Red traffic lights.
▷Stationary objects.
▷Cross traffic.
▷Approaching traffic.
Seite 110
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into your lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
you yourself must react, as the system does not
react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐
fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
detected at all, or not until after a considerable
delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the
vehicle by the system can be compensated for
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐
hind bumps in the road.
Seite 111
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Radar sensor
Position
Radar sensor
Dirty or covered sensor
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐
tion of vehicles.
▷If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully
▷Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
sor.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
not aligned correctly. This may be caused by
damage incurred during parking, for example.
A message is displayed if the system fails.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Collision warning with
braking function*
The concept
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
It responds to stationary or moving objects that
are within the detection range of the radar sys‐
tem.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with an object, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid false warnings.
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only. The
intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com‐
plete standstill.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 101, is
switched on.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The acute warning does not relieve the
driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her
Seite 112
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
driving speed and style to the traffic condi‐
tions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch
off the collision warning with the braking func‐
tion to prevent accidental interventions.
The braking function is deactivated if the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is deactivated.
Switching the warning function on/off
Press the button
▷On: the LED lights up.
▷Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Configuring the prewarning
After the warning function is switched on, the
following can be set via the iDrive:
▷The prewarning can be switched on/off.
▷The time of the prewarning can be set.
These settings have no effect on the time of the
warning from the Active Cruise Control* that
prompts the driver to intervene or brake.
Display
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display* and
acoustically.
Instrument cluster
The vehicle lights up in red: prewarning
The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capacity of the radar sensor and
the collision warning has limitations.
This may result in the warning not being issued
or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be
detected:
▷Slow moving objects when you approach
them at high speed.
▷Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
your vehicle.
▷Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷In tight curves.
▷If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
Seite 113
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Prewarning sensitivity
If the prewarning setting is too sensitive, there
may be an excess of false warnings.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷On curvy roads.
▷In heavy traffic.
▷On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
Controls
Buttons at a glance
1System on/off, interrupt
2Resume speed
3Store speed*
4Store, maintain/change speed
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control, refer to page 101, is
switched on as well, if necessary.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
▷If active: press twice.
▷If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷The brakes are applied.
▷Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the button.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 115.
Seite 114
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
Change, maintain speed
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/
1 km/h.
▷Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
▷Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure
on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is
released, the vehicle maintains its final
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re‐
sistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly.
The rocker switch can be pressed while inter‐
rupted to maintain and store the current speed.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1Display of desired speed
2Indicator lamp
3Brief status display
Desired speed
Display in the speedometer:
▷The marking lights up in
green: the system is active.
▷The marking lights up in or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Brief status display
Brief display in the speedometer:
Selected desired speed
If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad‐
equate to operate the system.
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera*, refer to page 120, can be
switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of* or behind
your vehicle are indicated with:
▷Signal tones.
▷Visual display.
Seite 115
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷By the front* sensors and two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/
1.50 m.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
▷With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷With low objects.
▷With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷In heavy rain.
▷When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷When sensors are covered in snow.
▷On rough road surfaces.
▷In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷In heavy exhaust.
▷Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐
ing forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷On: the LED lights up.
▷Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 116
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
▷If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 173.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
screen mask can also be turned by 90°.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Zoom view*
On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle
is shown enlarged.
▷Transmission position D engaged: front
area of the vehicle.
▷Transmission position R engaged: rear area
of the vehicle.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.
Seite 117
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. Press the controller.
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Malfunction
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
screen mask can also be turned by 90°.
A Check Control message, refer to page 83, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
On the Control Display, the areas in front of and
behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed.
Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View*
The concept
Surround View includes the following systems:
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 120
▷ Side View, refer to page 122.
▷ Top View, refer to page 118.
It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering
and on blind driveways and intersections.
Top View*
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneuver‐
ing. The area around the doors and the road area
around the vehicle are shown on the Control
Display for this purpose.
Capturing the image
The image is captured by two cameras inte‐
grated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup
camera.
The range equals:
▷approx. 10 ft/3 m to the side.
▷approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
terior mirrors are detected early.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
tions:
▷With a door open.
▷With the tailgate open.
▷With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐
ward.
Seite 118
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
▷Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐
ing forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷On: the LED lights up.
▷Off: the LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 119.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to Top
View:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With Top View switched on:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.
2. Press the controller.
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷The variable, green pathway line assists you
in assessing the amount of space actually
needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the controller.
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
Seite 119
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Cameras
The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 253.
Backup camera*
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in park‐
ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐
hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup cam‐
era.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷After approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when driving
forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷On: the LED lights up.
▷Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer
to page 122.
Assistance functions
Functional requirement
▷The backup camera is switched on.
▷The tailgate is fully closed.
Pathway lines
▷Can be shown in the backup camera image
when in transmission position R.
▷Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Seite 120
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
▷Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121.
Turning circle lines
▷Can be shown in the backup camera image.
▷Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
▷Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines
1. "Parking aid lines" Select the symbol.
2. Press the controller.
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking
1. "Obstacle marking" Select the symbol.
2. Press the controller.
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Seite 121
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.
2. Press the controller.
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 253.
Side View*
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two
cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Display
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐
sult from road users or objects located outside
the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀
Switching off automatically
System switches off: above approx. 9 mph/
15 km/h.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Seite 122
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
Display on the Control Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the
position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Cameras
The two camera lenses are located on the sides
of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 253.
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection*
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night
vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of
the vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐
trol Display.
The picture is a heat image. The system has an
integrated pedestrian detection function that
detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects
that are similar in shape to human beings are
detected by the system.
Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the
actual visibility conditions must always be the
basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;
otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
Seite 123
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Pedestrian detection
Warm objects that are similar in shape to human
beings are detected by the system.
People detected by the system are displayed
with a slight yellow hue.
Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian
detection system operates within a range of ap‐
prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.
Warning of people in danger
If the system detects a person in a defined area
in front of the vehicle and if a collision with this
person is imminent, a warning symbol appears
in the Control Display and Head-up Display*.
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided
into two areas.
▷Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle.
▷Expanded area 2 to the right and left.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for
example.
This symbol is displayed when a person
is detected in the central area, arrow 1,
immediately in front of the vehicle.
This symbol is displayed when a person
detected in the extended area, arrow 2,
is moving from the right or left to the
central area.
The symbols in the Head-up Display* corre‐
spond to the symbols in the Control Display. For
people located in the central area, the distance
to the person is indicated by the size of the sym‐
bol.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
System limits
Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
System operation is limited in situations such as
the following:
▷On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷At very high external temperatures.
Pedestrian detection
Limited pedestrian detection:
▷When people are fully or partially covered,
especially when their heads are covered.
▷When people are not in an upright position,
e.g., when lying down.
▷Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
Seite 124
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
▷After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
Activation/deactivation
Press the button.
Display
Heat image
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not
available on the rear screen.
Pedestrian detection
Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐
ity of pedestrian detection. If pedestrian detec‐
tion is not available, a symbol is displayed in the
heat image.
This symbol disappears when the function be‐
comes available again.
The pedestrian detection and warning system
only operates in darkness and only when a heat
image is displayed.
Adjustments via the iDrive
With Night Vision switched on:
1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐
tion.
2. Press the controller.
3. Open the desired menu item.
▷1: "Brightness"
▷2: "Contrast"
▷3: "Pedestrian detection"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 125
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Camera
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐
ation.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps.
Clean the lens, refer to page 253.
Head-up Display*
The concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by:
▷Certain sitting positions.
▷Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷Wet roads.
▷Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Display
1Lane departure warning*
2Active Cruise Control*
3Desired speed
4Navigation system*
5Speed
The collision warning* or Check Control mes‐
sages are displayed briefly if needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Displayed information"
Seite 126
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving comfort
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
When the low beams are switched on, the basic
setting can be made using the instrument light‐
ing, refer to page 89.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adjusting the height
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.
Seite 127
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Climate control
Automatic climate control*
1Air distribution, left side
2Temperature, left side
3AUTO program, left side
4Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat,
left side
5Remove ice and condensation
6Maximum cooling
7Display
8Air volume, AUTO intensity, right side
9AUTO program, right side
10 Temperature, right side
11 Air distribution, right side
12 Seat heating*, right side 50
13 Active seat ventilation*, right side 51
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 ALL program
18 Active seat ventilation*, left side 51
19 Seat heating*, left side 50
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷Upper body region.
▷Upper body region and footwell.
▷Footwell.
▷Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐
sation sensor.
Seite 128
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Climate control
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 130, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
0 ℃.
▷When the engine is running.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and controls the shut-off automati‐
cally.
▷Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Seite 129
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
If the windows are fogged over, switch off
the recirculated-air mode and press the
AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize
the condensation sensor. Make sure that air
can flow onto the windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and
– depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 148, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
All program
Press the button.
The current settings on the driver's side
for temperature, air volume, air distribution, and
AUTO program are transferred to the front pas‐
senger side and to the left and right rear*.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side and in the rear* are
changed.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
interior.
Functional requirement
▷Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷Warm engine.
▷The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
Switching on
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Press the right side of the button on
the driver's side.
is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐
mate control.
The interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐
tribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the
button on the driver's side.
on the display of the automatic climate control
goes out.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
▷Complete system:
At the lowest fan speed, press the
left side of the button on the driver's
side.
▷On the front passenger side:
At the lowest fan speed, press the
left side of the button on the front
passenger side.
Switching on
Press any button.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
Seite 130
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Climate control
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance of your vehicle.
More information can be found in the service re‐
quirements display, refer to page 82.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐
ture, arrows 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷Thumb wheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Ventilation levels*
▷Draft-free ventilation:
Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air
current is fanned out.
▷Maximum air volume:
Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air
is partially fanned out and partially bundled.
This maximizes the air supply.
▷Direct ventilation:
Thumb wheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is
bundled and can be directed to a specific
point.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from
the sun.
▷Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in rear, center
▷Thumb wheels* for adjusting the tempera‐
ture, arrows 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷Thumb wheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Lateral ventilation*
Thumb wheel for opening and closing the vents
continuously, arrow.
Seite 131
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Rear automatic climate
control*
At a glance
1Temperature
2AUTO program
3Vent settings
4Air volume, AUTO intensity
5Display
6Maximum cooling
7Seat heating* 53
8Active seat ventilation* 53
Switching the rear automatic climate
control on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate control"
The rear automatic climate control is not opera‐
tional if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the upper body and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Manual air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted to individual
needs.
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷Upper body region.
▷Upper body region and footwell.
▷Footwell.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Seite 132
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Climate control
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left
side of the button on the driver's side.
Switching on
Press any button.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
0 ℃.
▷When the engine is running.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle
interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The system can be switched on and off directly
or by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐
mains switched on for 30 minutes.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Parked-car ventilation
Using the preset switch-on time or when oper‐
ated directly: any external temperature.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The system is switched on. The symbol
on the automatic climate control flashes.
The system continues to run for some time after
being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Enter the desired time.
5. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
Activating the switch-on time
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
The activation time is activated. The
symbol on the automatic climate control lights
up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 133
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Interior equipment
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
This system can replace up to three different
hand-held transmitters for various types of re‐
mote-controlled equipment, such as garage
doors or lighting systems.
The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro‐
grammed on one of the three memory buttons.
The corresponding device can then be operated
using the programmed memory button.
The LED indicates that a signal is being trans‐
mitted.
When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro‐
grams for security reasons.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the universal remote control,
ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob‐
jects in the range of movement of the remote-
controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of
injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the instructions of the hand-held
transmitter, the remote-controlled de‐
vice is generally compatible with the universal
remote control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷Your service center.
▷www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Programming
▷LED, arrow 1.
▷Memory buttons, arrow 2.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes.
All programs of the three memory buttons,
arrow 2, are cleared.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐
ory buttons.
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of
the hand-held transmitter and the memory
button of the universal remote control.
The LED flashes slowly.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
The device can be operated using the memory
button with the engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Malfunction
If the device cannot be used after repeated at‐
tempts at programming, please check whether
the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an
alternating code system.
Seite 134
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Interior equipment
To do so:
▷Read the instructions of the hand-held
transmitter.
▷Press the memory button of the universal
remote control for an extended period.
If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and
then lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec‐
onds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped
with an alternating code system.
In this case, program the memory buttons as
described under Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters.
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
Please obtain information on synchronizing the
device in the operating manual of the device be‐
ing set up.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled device.
2. Program the universal remote control as de‐
scribed above under Fixed-code hand-held
transmitters.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec‐
onds until the device to be adjusted is acti‐
vated.
If the device does not become activated,
press and hold the button and watch the
LED:
▷If the LED lights up continuously, the
programming is completed. The device
should become activated when the but‐
ton is pressed briefly.
▷If the LED flashes for approx. 2 seconds
and then lights up continuously, con‐
tinue the programming procedure be‐
ginning with step 4.
4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.
5. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds
for the next step.
6. Press the programmed memory button of
the universal remote control three times.
The device can be operated when the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the mem‐
ory buttons.
3. Press the memory button of the universal
remote control.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly.
All stored programs are deleted.
The programs cannot be deleted individually.
Seite 135
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Ashtray/cigarette lighter*
Front
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Rear
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Connecting electrical devices
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used for electrical de‐
vices up to approx. 200 watts with 12 volts with
the engine running or the ignition switched on.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Front center console
Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
Seite 136
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Interior equipment
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the trunk
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Trunk
Trunk cover
Note
Do not deposit heavy objects
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the trunk cover. Otherwise, they could endanger
occupants during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers, for example.◀
Removing
To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐
moved.
1. Place your hands into the two recessed
grips on the bottom of the cover.
2. Push up the cover.
The cover can be stowed in the rear compart‐
ment in the trunk, refer to page 143.
Installing
1. Insert the trunk cover into the two front re‐
taining pins.
2. Fold down the cover until it engages.
Through-loading system
General information
The trunk can be expanded by folding down the
trunk partition and the rear seat backrest.
Seite 137
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The trunk partition and the rear backrest are
subdivided at a ratio of 40–20–40. You can also
fold down the left and right sides separately.
Foldable rear backrests, manual
Pull the lever. The backrest folds forward.
Fold the backrest back; the backrest engages in
an upright position. Pull the lever again to adjust
the backrest to the desired angle.
Locking the backrests
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀
Foldable rear backrests, powered*
1Fold backrest forward
2Loading position
3Basic position
Fold backrest forward
Move the front seats to an upright position
Before folding down the rear backrests,
ensure that the front seats are moved forward
slightly and are in an upright position. Other‐
wise, the head restraint and screen could be
damaged.◀
Press the button until the backrest is
folded all the way forward.
Folding the backrest back
Before anyone can be transported in the rear:
1. Put the rear seat backrests into their stand‐
ard position.
2. For the best possible individual seat posi‐
tion, adjust the inclination of the rear seat
backrest if necessary.
Adjust the standard position of the rear
seat backrest
Before transporting anyone in the rear and ad‐
justing the individual seat position, adjust the
standard position of the rear seat backrests.
Otherwise, the restraining effect of the seats can
be limited in an accident because the backrest
position is set too steep.◀
Loading position
Press the button. The seat moves for‐
ward and the backrest moves to the ba‐
sic position. Comfortable seating is still possible
although knee clearance is reduced.
Basic position
Press and hold the button until the seat
stops automatically in its basic position.
Operation of the rear backrest was
deactivated
After a brief period, operation of the rear back‐
rest is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate operation:
▷Open or close a door or the tailgate.
▷Press a button on the remote control.
▷Press the Start/Stop button.
Folding down the trunk partition
1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Seite 138
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Interior equipment
2. To release the trunk partition, pull the cor‐
responding lever in the trunk. The trunk par‐
tition folds forward.
Unlocking the middle trunk partition
Press the opener toward the left.
Closing the trunk partition
Folding back and engaging the trunk partition.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the path of the cargo cover
is clear when folding it back up; otherwise, inju‐
ries may result.◀
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. If it is not properly
engaged, transported cargo could enter the
passenger compartment during braking or eva‐
sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu‐
pants.◀
Loading position
To expand the trunk, the cargo cover can be
moved into a vertical position.
1. Move the rear backrest to the loading posi‐
tion, refer to page 138.
2. To release the cargo cover, pull both levers
in the trunk. The cargo cover folds into an
upright position and rests against the rear
backrest.
Repositioning
Fold back the cargo cover and snap into place
Ski and snowboard bag*
General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the trunk.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
Seite 139
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and front
passenger side, refer to page 140.
▷ Storage compartment in the center console,
refer to page 142.
▷Storage compartment in the center armrest,
refer to page 141, in the front and rear.
▷Compartments in the doors.
▷Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats*.
▷Net in the front passenger footwell.
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
Connection for importing and exporting data on
USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33.
▷ Music collection, refer to page 187.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Seite 140
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Storage compartments
Driver's side
Opening
Pull the handle.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
The storage compartment in the armrest can be
locked with a key to separately secure the tail‐
gate, refer to page 41, for example.
After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed out without the in‐
tegrated key, refer to page 32, for instance at a
hotel.
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
ment and to the trunk.
Connection for an external audio
device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 192.
▷ USB audio interface*, refer to page 193.
Rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Seite 141
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Folding down
Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.
Opening
Storage compartment in the rear center arm‐
rest.
Storage compartment in the
center console
To open: press the button.
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Front
To open: press on the cover.
Rear
In the front center armrest.
To open: press the button.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located next to the grab
handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Seite 142
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Storage compartments
Storage compartments in the
trunk
Retaining straps
Retaining straps on the left* and right side trim
for fastening small objects.
Multi-function hook
There are two multi-function hooks on the trunk
walls.
1. Open the holder by pressing on the button.
2. Press the bag handle into the holder from
above.
Light and suitable objects only
Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of
objects flying about during braking and evasive
maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
been appropriately secured.◀
Storage compartments in the floor
Rear compartment
The trunk cover, refer to page 137, can be
stowed in the rear compartment.
To open the cover, pull upward on the handle,
arrow 1.
To close the cover, press downward until it
locks.
You can fix the cover in an upright position, if
needed. To do so, unhook the right-hand retain‐
ing strap and hook it into the rear of the cover.
Do not stow heavy objects
Only stow light objects in the rear com‐
partment; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Front compartment
To open, reach into the recess and raise the
handle, arrow 2.
The cover can be completely removed.
Lashing eyes
To secure cargo, refer to page 149, with nets or
draw straps, the trunk is fitted with lashing eyes.
Seite 143
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to approx. 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds but do
not exceed:
▷In gasoline engines, 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/
300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive conservatively during this
breaking-in period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only operate the vehicle with the tailgate
closed; otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter
the passenger compartment.◀
If the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate
open:
1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof*.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto‐
matic climate control system.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐
ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care
to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐
haust system and any highly flammable materi‐
als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious
personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
is the danger of getting burned.◀
Seite 146
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Things to remember when driving
Climate control windshield
The marked area is not covered with a heat-re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Climate control laminated tinted safety
glass
The vehicle glass provides full protection
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the
skin.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the
vehicle without connecting them directly to the
external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐
tronics and mobile communication devices can
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
assurance that the radiation generated during
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce
your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
Seite 147
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐
matic transmission, refer to page 72.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
No objects in the area around the pedals
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any
other objects to protrude into the area of pedal
movement and impair pedal operation.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷Low mileage.
▷Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
Loading
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying ca‐
pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard*:
▷The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
Seite 148
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Things to remember when driving
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as possible, ideally directly behind the trunk
partition.
▷Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷If necessary, fold down the rear backrests,
including the trunk partition, to stow cargo.
Securing cargo
▷Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, a trunk net* or draw straps.
▷Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps*.
Cargo straps can be attached to four lashing
eyes located in the trunk.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Special rack system as optional
accessory
A special rack system is available as an optional
accessory.
Follow the directions given in the installation in‐
structions.
Seite 149
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Anchorage points
Fold the cover outward.
Mounting
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for raising and opening the glass sunroof*.
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rack
Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-
mounted luggage racks cannot be mounted.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight, refer
to page 258.
▷Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷The roof load should not be too large in area.
▷Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely.
▷Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Saving fuel
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 238, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass sunroof*
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure, refer to page 227, at least twice a
month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Seite 150
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Things to remember when driving
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is
switched off for only approx. 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions that are not
currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 238.
Seite 151
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
Navigation system
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Destination input
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 24.
Stored town/city and street names can be called
up quickly.
▷If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/
city can be skipped.
▷Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1. Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the town/city name from the list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
With the Professional navigation system: A
preview map is displayed on the split screen.
3. Select the town/city.
Seite 154
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the postal code.
With the Professional navigation system: A
preview map is displayed on the split screen.
6. Select the postal code.
Entering a street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
With the Professional navigation system: A
preview map is displayed on the split screen.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
All streets of the selected state/province are of‐
fered. The associated town/city is displayed af‐
ter the street name.
The desired street does not exist in the specified
city/town because it belongs to another part of
the city/town.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. "In" the displayed state/province.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street.
With the Professional navigation system: A
preview map is displayed on the split screen.
9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
▷Adjusting "Route preference", refer to
page 162.
▷Searching "Points of Interest at loc.", refer
to page 157.
Address book
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book": contacts with addresses
are displayed if these have been checked as
destinations.
If the mobile phone* does not display the
contacts with addresses, they must first be
Seite 155
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
checked as a destination, refer to
page 214.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
"A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 213.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. Start destination guidance.
Seite 156
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
Last destinations
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.
The destinations can be called up and used as a
destination for destination guidance.
Calling up the last destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. Start destination guidance.
Editing the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
Opening the search for special
destinations
To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or
tourist attractions:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
Narrow the search for special destinations
by specifying the location and category.
Position of special destinations
1. "Search area"
2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination: "At
current location", "At destination", "At a
different destination", "Along route"
Special destinations category
1. "Category"
2. Select "All" or the specific category of the
special destination, e.g., hotels or restau‐
rants.
Category details
For some special destinations, additional details
can be displayed that are available in the navi‐
gation data, e.g., an Italian-style restaurant.
"Category details"
Seite 157
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
▷"At current location"
The special destinations are listed ac‐
cording to their distance from the cur‐
rent location and are displayed with a di‐
rectional arrow pointing to the
destination.
▷"At destination", "At a different
destination" and "Along route"
Special destinations are sorted by the
distance to the search point.
▷Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map view as sym‐
bols. The display depends on the scale
of the map and the category.
2. Highlight the special destination.
With the Professional navigation system: A
preview map is displayed on the split screen.
3. Select a special destination.
4. Select the symbol.
5. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
Destination entry via BMW Assist*
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 217.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Entering the special destination by its
name
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Select the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a max‐
imum of 100 entries.
5. Change to the list of special destinations.
6. Highlight the special destination.
With the Professional navigation system: A
preview map is displayed on the split screen.
7. Select a special destination.
8. Select the symbol.
9. "Start guidance"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination via map
Opening the map
1. "Navigation"
Seite 158
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
2. "Map"
The map section is displayed. The map shows
the current position of the vehicle.
Selecting the destination
1. Select the symbol.
"Interactive map" is started.
2. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷To change the scale: turn the controller.
▷To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
▷To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
3. Press the controller to display additional
menu items.
▷ Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest."
▷"Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷"Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis‐
plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi‐
nates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
▷ Select the symbol. Start destination
guidance to the location marked on the map.
▷"Exit interactive map"
▷"View in northern direction"
▷"Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷"Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷"Find points of interest"
Destination entry by voice*
General information
▷Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
▷When entering the destination by voice, you
can change between voice operation and
the iDrive.
▷To have the available spoken instructions
read aloud ›Voice commands‹
Saying the entries
▷Example: to enter a town/city in Germany as
a whole word, the language of the system
must be German.
▷The town/city, street, and house number
can be said as a single sentence.
▷Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐
tersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the language of the system, refer
to page 81.
▷Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
Seite 159
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Entering the address
1. Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Specify the desired address in the sug‐
gested form.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
6. If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g., the town/
city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city can either be said as a word or
spelled.
1. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹.
2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies may be suggested.
4. Select the town/city.
▷To select a recommended town/
city: ›Yes‹
▷To select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹
▷Select an entry: ›Entry ... ‹ e.g., entry 2
▷To spell an entry: ›Spell city‹
Entering a street or intersection
Enter a street or intersection in the same way as
you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number
House numbers can be entered up to the num‐
ber 999 999.
›House number‹
Say each digit separately.
Starting destination guidance
›Start guidance‹ or, if necessary, Enter new
destination‹
Storing a destination
The destination is automatically added to the list
of last destinations.
Planning a trip
New trip
Additional intermediate destinations can be en‐
tered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Enter new destination"
5. Select the type of destination entry and en‐
ter the intermediate destination.
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
Seite 160
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
2. Select the type of destination entry and en‐
ter the intermediate destination.
3. Select "Add as another dest.".
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted: "Reposition
dest. in the trip"
Starting the trip
After all intermediate destinations have been
entered, "Start guidance".
Or select a trip that has already been stored, if
available. "Stored trips"
With the Professional navigation
system: Storing a trip
Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip
list.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the letters.
4. "OK"
Trip direction
The trip direction is reversed: intermediate des‐
tinations are displayed in reverse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Options"
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options
1. "Destination in the trip"
2. Select an intermediate destination.
▷"Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷"Delete dest. in the trip"
With the Professional navigation
system: Deleting a trip
1. "Stored trips"
2. Highlight the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
Destination guidance
Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Make a destination entry, refer to
page 154.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
▷The route is shown on the Control Display.
▷The distance to the destination/intermedi‐
ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐
rival are displayed in the map view.
▷The arrow display is shown in the instrument
panel and on the Control Display if neces‐
sary.
Terminating destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination guidance
If the destination was not reached during the last
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Seite 161
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Route criteria
General information
▷The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
▷The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina‐
tion guidance.
▷Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when plan‐
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
▷The recommended route may differ from the
route you would take based on personal ex‐
perience.
▷The settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Changing the route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
▷"Fast route": time-optimized route, be‐
ing a combination of the shortest possi‐
ble route and the fastest roads.
▷"Efficient route": optimized combina‐
tion of the fastest and shortest route.
▷"Short route": short distance, irrespec‐
tive of how fast or slow progress will be.
▷"Alternative routes": other suggested
alternative routes.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
▷"Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷"Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
wherever possible.
▷"Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷Depending on the type of road and the na‐
ture and length of the traffic obstruction, the
route can also be calculated so that you
travel through the traffic obstruction.
Activating dynamic destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on
the Control Display.
▷List of streets and towns/cities.
▷ Map view, refer to page 164.
▷ Arrow display on the Head‐Up Display*, re‐
fer to page 126.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷Large arrow, current direction of travel.
▷Small arrow, indicator of next change in di‐
rection.
▷Intersection view.
▷Lane information.
▷Traffic bulletins.
▷Distance to next change in direction.
▷Street name at next change in direction.
Seite 162
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
Displaying a list of streets or towns/
cities on the route
When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis‐
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle‐
tins are displayed for each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
With the Professional navigation system:
The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Bypassing a section of the route
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the desired num‐
ber of miles.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐
tions along the route are recommended.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
With the Professional navigation system:
The position of the gas station is shown on
the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched
on
Spoken instructions are switched
off
Repeating spoken instructions
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
cess.
Seite 163
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Map view
Selecting the map view
Your location is indicated on the map.
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The following functions are directly available in
the map view:
Symbol Function
Starting/ending destination
guidance
Switching spoken instructions
on/off
Changing the route criteria
Searching for special destina‐
tions
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map view settings
Changing the scale
Press the controller to show/suppress addi‐
tional information on the map.
Changing the map section
Open the interactive map.
▷To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
▷To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The map shows the entire range from
your location to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
Set the optimized map view.
▷"Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions. When the
traffic situation/gray card is activated, this
setting is not taken into account.
▷With the Professional navigation system:
"Satellite images"
Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images* are displayed at scales of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
▷With the Professional navigation system:
"Perspective view in 3D"
Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas that
are contained in the navigation data are dis‐
played on the map in 3D.
▷"Traffic situation/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins. Symbols for the special destina‐
tions are no longer displayed.
With the Professional navigation
system: Map view for split screen
The map view can be selected for the split
screen independently from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is switched on.
3. Tilt the controller to the right until the split
screen contents are selected.
4. Select the map view.
Seite 164
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
▷"Map facing north"
▷"Map direction of travel"
▷"Map view with perspective"
5. To change the scale: change to the split
screen and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins*
At a glance
▷Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes‐
sage Channel) of a traffic information serv‐
ice. Information on traffic obstructions and
hazards is updated continuously.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display real-
time traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional terms
and conditions apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
End-User is in material breach of the terms
and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network through
which it is delivered. You may not modify,
copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
and hold harmless BMW of North America,
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
any and all claims, damages, costs or other
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
Network, including, but not limited to, any
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
or representations with respect to the li‐
censed material (including, without limita‐
tion, that the licensed material will be error-
free, will operate without interruption or that
the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐
bility, non-infringement fitness for a
particular purpose, or those arising from a
course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
dental damages (including, without limita‐
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
profits relating to the same) arising from any
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
possibility of such damages. These limita‐
tions apply to all claims, including, without
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such
as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
tial damages, so those particular limitations
may not apply to you.
▷The traffic information is displayed in the
map.
Switching the reception on/off
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Opening the traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
Seite 165
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. "Map"
Move the controller to the left.
Select the symbol.
3. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of
their distance from the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
Select the symbol to obtain additional
information.
Traffic bulletins in the map
When the traffic situation/gray card is activated,
the view on the Control Display is switched over
to shades of gray. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is dis‐
regarded in this setting. Symbols and special
destinations are not displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic situation/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the
calculated route.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
Set which traffic bulletins are to be displayed in
the map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Set the filter.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐
played in the map.
▷Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
▷For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
den.
Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance
▷ "Dynamic guidance", refer to page 162
This feature influences the behavior of the
system.
▷During destination guidance, obstructions
on the route are taken into consideration.
▷Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
Traffic obstructions
The system calculates the optimized route, tak‐
ing into consideration traffic obstructions and
road types.
Selecting a detour
Set whether traffic obstructions should be taken
into consideration during route planning.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. Select a traffic obstruction that you wish to
bypass.
4. "Recomm. detour"
Seite 166
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
Taking traffic obstructions into
consideration
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
4. Select "Recomm. detour", if necessary.
"Dynamic guidance" is activated automati‐
cally.
Navigation data
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version" information is
displayed on the data version.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your service center. Navigation
data are stored in the vehicle and can be up‐
dated.
▷Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷The basic navigation is available during the
trip.
▷The status of the update can be queried in
the options menu.
▷The system restarts after the update.
▷The data carrier with the navigation data can
be removed after the update is complete.
Professional navigation system:
Perform the update
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
After an interruption of the trip, follow the in‐
structions on the Control Display.
What to do if...
▷The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
be determined.
Input any street in the selected city and start
destination guidance.
▷The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination.
Select a goal that is as close as possible to
the original.
▷The map view is shown in shades of gray?
When the traffic situation/gray card is acti‐
vated, the view on the Control Display is
switched over to shades of gray. This ena‐
bles a better view of the traffic bulletins.
▷Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
Seite 167
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
culate a new route suggestion.
Seite 168
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Navigation
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Entertainment
The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations and playing
CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Tone
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷"Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷"Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To confirm: press the controller.
Equalizer*
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback,
surround*
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
Multi-channel playback, surround, is simulated
when playing back an audio track in stereo.
Seite 172
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Tone
Multi-channel playback is automatically acti‐
vated or deactivated, depending on the audio
track selected.
Volume
▷"Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷"PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
▷"Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Seite 173
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Radio
Controls
1Change entertainment sources
2Change station/track
3Programmable memory buttons
4Volume, on/off
5Change wave band
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Changing the station via the button
Press the button.
Storing a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Seite 174
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Radio
RDS*
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band. When
playing a station with multiple frequencies, the
system automatically switches to the frequency
with the best reception, if needed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Due to
time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe‐
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐
tist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds. If reception is interrupted
for an extended period, it switches back to the
main station.
Weather Band*
General information
The availability of the Weather Band and the
number of available channels can vary depend‐
ing on the region.
Switching on the Weather Band
1. "Radio"
2. "Weather band"
3. Select the desired channel.
Additional information
Weather Band is a service of the National Oce‐
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).
Seite 175
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Additional information on the Internet:
www.nws.noaa.gov.
Satellite radio*
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/
open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 23.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
Seite 176
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Radio
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via the iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the buttons on the center console
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Select channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Selecting a category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must
be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer
is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
Seite 177
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
▷The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
For live transmissions: "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐
tivated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷Activation of the voice activation system.
▷Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Seite 178
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Radio
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
onds: "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad‐
cast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Notes
▷Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
▷The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages; next to tall buildings;
or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Seite 179
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Stored stations
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Seite 180
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Radio
CD/multimedia
Controls
1Change the entertainment source
2CD/DVD* drive
3Eject CD/DVD
4Change station/track
5Programmable memory buttons
6Volume, on/off
CD/DVD*
CD/DVD playback
Loading the CD/DVD* player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
There is a CD/DVD in the CD/DVD player or
changer.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD* player
... DVD changer*
CD/DVD player, rear*
Playable formats
▷DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video*.
▷CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD*, SVCD*.
▷Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired track is played.
Seite 181
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Selecting the track using the iDrive
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly.
1. Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
▷Interpret.
▷Album track.
▷Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
▷File name of track.
Random playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all
tracks within the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Seite 182
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
CD/multimedia
Automatic repeat*
The selected track, directories, or CDs/DVDs
are repeated automatically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on
the DVD.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
0 All regions
Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the
parking brake is set or if the automatic trans‐
mission is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
Video menu
To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
ing playback.
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu.
Start playback.
Pause
Stop
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐
ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
Seite 183
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language*
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the subtitles*
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Selecting the zoom
Display the video image on the entire screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Seite 184
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
CD/multimedia
Selecting a track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle*
The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
DVD changer*
In the glove compartment
Pull down the release cover.
The DVD changer tilts down.
To close: fold the DVD changer up until it en‐
gages.
Fold up the DVD changer
Always fold the DVD changer back up after
filling and emptying it; otherwise, the DVD
changer could be damaged.◀
Controls and displays
1Empty DVD compartments
2LED on DVD slot
3Buttons for DVD compartments
4DVD slot
5Fill DVD compartments
Filling the DVD compartments
individually
1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
Filling all empty DVD compartments
1. Hold the button down.
Seite 185
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash.
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash
and then insert a CD or DVD into the center.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
and placed into the vacant compartments.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Removing a single CD/DVD
1. Press the button.
2. Select the DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1. Hold the button down.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Malfunctions
If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap‐
idly, a malfunction has occurred.
To eliminate the malfunction:
1. Press one of the buttons:
▷
▷
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
The DVD changer is functional again after the
LEDs stop flashing rapidly.
Audio playback*
The audio track of a DVD can be played back
even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
hicle.
Only the main film without the previews or extras
can be played back.
Starting playback
A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
Selecting a chapter using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired chapter is played.
Selecting a chapter using iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Select the desired chapter.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Selecting the language*
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Audio/language"
6. Select the desired language.
Notes
CD/DVD player and changer
Do not remove the cover
Seite 186
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
CD/multimedia
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are offi‐
cially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not
operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, se‐
vere eye damage may occur.◀
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device.
▷Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
and no longer eject.
▷Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
General malfunctions
▷CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be.
▷If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
▷Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
only be used for private purposes. Copying of
this technology is prohibited.
Music collection*
Storing music
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
an album. The WMA, MP3, and AAC formats
are stored. Individual tracks and directories
Seite 187
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
can be deleted later, Deleting a track and di‐
rectory, refer to page 191.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
disk.◀
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
ery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
this will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored
can be called up.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name of
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Seite 188
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
CD/multimedia
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
▷Unsuitable devices: USB hard discs, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the
USB audio interface in the center armrest.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 140.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 190.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired entry.
▷Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24,
and input the desired entry.
▷Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search using spoken instructions*
Instructions for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Seite 189
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ... ‹.
Say the spoken instruction and the name of the
desired track in a single sentence.
Current playback
List of tracks that was generated last by the mu‐
sic search or the album selected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if pos‐
sible.
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Seite 190
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
CD/multimedia
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album*
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown it can be changed later if
needed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐
ing a long trip.
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 140.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
Seite 191
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
7. "Backup music on USB"
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
External devices
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*/mobile phone
audio interface*
Rear AUX-IN port*
Rear AUX-IN port on the right*
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.
Connect the headphones or line-out connector
of the device to the jack plug.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "External devices"
4. "AUX front"
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
Seite 192
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
CD/multimedia
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface*/mobile phone
audio interface*
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated on the iDrive. The sound
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
▷Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
▷Connection via snap-in adapter when equip‐
ped with extended connectivity of the music
player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Playback is only possible if no connector is
plugged into the USB audio interface.
Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
ble on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷MP3.
▷WMA.
▷WAV (PCM).
▷AAC.
▷Playback lists: M3U.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via
USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
To connect the device, use the special cable
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available
from your service center. The cable adapter is
required for a good connection.
Use the cable adapter for the Apple
iPod/iPhone to connect the Apple
iPod/iPhone with the AUX-IN port
and the USB interface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu
structure is supported by the USB audio inter‐
face.
Connection of a USB device via the
USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect
the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage.
Seite 193
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Connect the USB device to the
USB interface.
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 16,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐
ing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The playback starts with the first track.
When an Apple iPhone is connected via the
snap-in adapter and an audio device is con‐
nected to the AUX-IN port at the same time, the
audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.
On the Splitscreen*, the CD cover for the music
track might be displayed after a few seconds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷Playback lists.
▷Information: type of music, artist, album,
track.
▷Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
▷Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
▷Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
played.
6. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Seite 194
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
CD/multimedia
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the cor‐
responding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
▷The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not connect the de‐
vice to the power socket in the vehicle.
▷Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷Do not use the audio interface to recharge
external devices.
Seite 195
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Rear entertainment*
Controls
1Screen, left
2Screen, right
3Center armrest, remote control
4CD/DVD player
Rear CD/DVD player
1CD/DVD slot
2Eject CD/DVD
3On/off, right
4Headphone connection, right
5RCA sockets
6Headphone connection, left
7On/off, left
Switching the system on/off
Press the left or right side of the button
on the CD/DVD player in the rear for the
respective page.
Rear entertainment and screens are switched
on/off.
After switching off the ignition, the system must
be switched on again.
Screens
Adjusting
Danger of burns when screen is folded out
Do not reach behind the screen; other‐
wise, there is the danger of getting burned. The
back of the screen can become very hot.◀
▷To fold out: pull at the bottom edge.
▷To fold in: press against the bottom edge.
Notes
▷Do not cover lower screen edge, since this
is where the sensors and the infrared inter‐
face are installed.
▷When loading the rear seats and adjusting
the backrest of the front seat, fold in the
screens.
▷When using the through-loading system,
fold the screens down.
▷When cleaning the screen, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 253.
Seite 196
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Rear entertainment
Remote control
In the center armrest in the rear
Storage is possible in a vertical or horizontal po‐
sition in the center armrest.
Menu navigation
Press the but‐
ton
Function
Operating concept as for the
front controller.
Turn the wheel: highlight a
menu item.
Press the center knob: con‐
firm the selection.
Press the arrow buttons:
change between panels.
Opens the main menu.
Displays the previous menu.
Opens the "Options" menu.
Changes the station, track or
chapter.
Press and hold the button:
fast forward/reverse.
Press the but‐
ton
Function
Adjusts the volume.
Switches the volume adjust‐
ment to the left/right.
For Rear seat entertainment
Professional*: Switch over
between the display screens.
The transmission time of the remote control is
limited by law. To execute a function again,
press or turn the required button again.
Replacing the batteries
No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, as
damage may result from the substances in the
batteries.◀
1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar‐
row 1, and push forward, arrow 2.
2. Insert batteries of the same type.
3. Close the cover.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
Controls
Almost all functions can be operated in the same
manner as they are in the front. Special features
of operating the system in the rear are described
here.
Seite 197
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Audio/video playback
Audio
Audio can be played back via rear entertainment
from any source in the vehicle.
Operation is the same as for the front audio play‐
back, refer to page 181.
Video
Video can be played back in the rear from the
following sources:
▷DVD changer*.
▷Rear CD/DVD player.
▷External device in rear.
If a video image is being played back in the rear,
the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected in
the front.
Operation is the same as for the front video play‐
back, refer to page 183.
Radio
When the same radio source is selected in the
front and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta‐
tion is played.
Operation is the same as for the front radio, refer
to page 174.
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD
When the same audio source (front CD/DVD
player, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se‐
lected in the front and rear, the same material is
played.
Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD,
refer to page 181.
Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 186.
Music collection*
Music can only be stored and data can only be
exported and imported via the front CD/DVD
player or the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
When music collections are selected in the front
and rear, they are played back separately.
Operation is the same as for the front music col‐
lection, refer to page 187.
Tone
Only treble and bass can be set in the rear. The
settings are made separately for the left and
right headphones.
Operation is the same as for the front tone, refer
to page 172.
Contacts*
Operation is the same as for the front contacts,
refer to page 213.
Navigation*
Route planning can be performed separately on
the left and right sides in the rear. Destination
guidance can only be started from the front.
Operation is the same as for the front navigation,
refer to page 154.
Suggesting a destination
A destination or trip can be sent to the front as
a suggestion. The suggestion can be adopted,
stored, or declined in the front. This function is
not available with the following setting: "Driver
control".
1. Enter the destination.
2. "Suggest destination"
BMW Assist*
Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in the
front, refer to page 216.
Adjusting
The following settings are available:
▷"Rear displays"
▷"Language/Units": language can be set
globally for all screens.
▷"Tone"
▷If necessary, "Climate"
Seite 198
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Rear entertainment
Vehicle information*
Computer content can be displayed. Operation
is only possible in the front.
Options menu
The split screen is not available and there is no
integrated Owner's Manual.
Operation is the same as for the front menu op‐
tions, refer to page 21.
Enabling
Enabling operation in the rear
Only possible via the iDrive in the front.
1. "Settings"
2. "Allow rear control"
3. Select the desired priority.
Priority options
The driver has priority
▷The source selected via iDrive in the front is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers and can
be selected but not operated from the rear.
Other audio or video sources can be oper‐
ated.
▷Sound can only be output in the rear via
headphones.
▷The source that is to be displayed in the rear
can be set via the iDrive in the front.
To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the
front:
1. Open "Options".
2. "Select rear source"
3. Select the desired audio or video source.
Same priority
▷All audio and video sources can be operated
via the iDrive in the front and rear.
▷Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected last via the iDrive in the front
or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak‐
ers.
The rear has priority
▷When the source selected in the rear is
played on headphones, it can be selected
but not operated via iDrive in the front. Other
audio or video sources can be operated.
▷Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected in the rear is output on the
vehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour‐
ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the
front.
Switching off the rear DVD
▷Rear entertainment is switched off.
▷To switch rear entertainment back on: select
a different priority via the iDrive in the front
and switch on the system, refer to
page 196.
Headphones, vehicle
loudspeakers
Connecting the headphones
Normal headphones
Connect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer to
page 196, on the rear CD/DVD player.
Seite 199
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Infrared headphones
Connection via the infrared interface on the
lower edge of the screen.
Fitting infrared headphones and information on
which headphones are supported can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
When using infrared headphones, ensure that
the connection between the headphones and
the infrared interface is not disrupted:
▷Do not place an obstacle between the inter‐
face and headphones.
▷Do not cover the interface.
▷Do not scratch the interface.
Fold up display screens for interference-free re‐
ception.
Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am‐
bient light can impair reception.
Sound output on the headphones or
vehicle loudspeakers
Operation is only possible in the rear.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers"
With the following setting, sound output in the
rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers:
"Driver control".
External devices
General information
External audio and video devices and digital
cameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re‐
fer to page 196, on the CD/DVD player. Opera‐
tion takes place on the external device.
Due to the large number of different audio and
video devices available on the market, it cannot
be ensured that every audio and video device
will be displayed correctly on the screen.
Connecting an external device
1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch
sockets on the CD/DVD player.
2. Connect the external device to the RCA
sockets.
▷Video: yellow socket.
▷Audio: white and red socket.
Starting playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
The volume can only be adjusted if no external
video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
Seite 200
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Rear entertainment
What to do if...
▷Only a black screen is visible.
Switch on the system.
▷There are no options available on the
screen.
Replace remote control batteries.
With Professional rear seat entertainment
toggle between screens if necessary.
▷Radio stations or TV channels are grayed
out and can not be selected.
Function is limited due to the selected pri‐
ority. Change priority.
▷The DVD does not play.
Playback does not begin automatically.
Start DVD manually, refer to page 183.
▷The volume of the rear vehicle speakers
cannot be adjusted.
Sound in the rear is output via the head‐
phones. Change priority if necessary and
output sound via vehicle speakers.
Seite 201
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Telephone*
At a glance
The concept
After the mobile phone is paired once with the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
the iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spo‐
ken instructions.
A paired mobile phone is automatically detected
as soon as it is located inside the vehicle, when
the ignition is switched on.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter*
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷Hold the mobile phone.
▷Recharge the battery.
▷Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
tenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
Inquire with your service center which mobile
phones containing a Bluetooth interface are
supported by the mobile phone preparation
package. Additional information can be found at
www.bmw.com/bluetooth.
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
this may lead to a malfunction.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
Requirements
▷The mobile phone is suitable.
▷The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to
page 205, and on the mobile phone.
▷Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions.
▷A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
key. It is only required once for pairing.
▷The ignition is switched on.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con‐
trol Display.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. "Add new phone"
Seite 204
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Telephone
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
hicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: what to do if, refer
to page 206.
Following the initial pairing
▷The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
▷After they have been identified, phone book
entries are transferred from the SIM card
and/or mobile phone to the vehicle; this de‐
pends on the mobile phone.
▷Four mobile phones can be paired.
▷Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is
connected. A different mobile phone can be
connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
nected.
Seite 205
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Unpairing the mobile phone
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐
paired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Not all phone book entries are displayed.
▷Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete; note the display in the sta‐
tus field.
▷It may only be possible to transmit the phone
book entries on the SIM card* or the mobile
phone.
▷It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
The mobile phone cannot be paired.
▷Is the mobile phone supported? For infor‐
mation, contact your service center.
▷Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con‐
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
▷The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and on again.
▷Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷If all items on the list have been checked and
the mobile phone still cannot be paired,
please contact Customer Relations.
Controls
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, the
name of the contact is displayed.
Accepting a call
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
"Accept"
Via the iDrive
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
Via the instrument cluster
"Reject"
Via the iDrive
"Reject"
Seite 206
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Telephone
Ending a call
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
"End call"
Via the iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. Select an active call.
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls and connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, hold call
Active call: indicated by a red handset.
Call on hold: indicated by a green handset.
To switch to the call on hold, select this handset.
Seite 207
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 213.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
Select the symbol. Contact with one
phone number. The connection is being es‐
tablished.
2. Select the symbol. Contact with more
than one phone number. Select the phone
number, the connection is being estab‐
lished.
A telephone call is not possible, the mobile
phone has no coverage or no network or a Serv‐
ice Request is active.
Editing a contact
Change the entries in "Contacts". When a con‐
tact is changed, the changes are not stored on
the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored
in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The eight phone numbers dialed last are dis‐
played.
Dialing the number via the instrument
cluster
This is possible when there is no active call.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Dialing the number via the iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry.
The connection is established.
Seite 208
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Telephone
Deleting a single entry or all entries
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. If necessary. "Store contact".
Received calls
Displaying calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
played.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. If necessary. "Store contact".
Messages
Display of different messages:
▷My Info messages from the BMW Assist
portal.
▷ Message from the Concierge service, refer
to page 217.
MyInfo
Starting destination guidance
1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
Dialing the number in the message
1. Select the message.
2. "Call"
Message from the Concierge service
Using an address in destination guidance
1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest."
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
Seite 209
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Dialing the number in the message
1. Select the message.
2. "Call"
Storing an address
1. Select the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Deleting messages
1. Highlight the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
Voice operation*
The concept
▷The mobile phone can be operated without
taking your hands from the steering wheel.
▷In many cases, the entries are accompanied
by announcements or questions.
▷›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
Press the button. ›Help‹. Possible commands
are announced.
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
a sequence to accelerate the entry.
Using alternative commands
In many cases, the system is able to recognize
several commands to execute the same func‐
tion, such as the following:
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Example: dialing a phone number
1. Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
2. ›Dial number‹
The system says: »Please say the number«
Seite 210
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Telephone
3. E.g., ›123 456 790‹
The system says: »123 456 790. Continue?
«
4. ›Dial number‹
The system says: »Dialing number«
Calling
Dialing a phone number
1. ›Dial number‹
2. Say the phone number.
3. ›Dial‹
Correcting the phone number
The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system has repeated the digits.
›Correct number‹
The command can be repeated as often as nec‐
essary.
Deleting a phone number
›Delete‹
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Redialing
›Redial‹
Voice phone book*
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
tion and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Saving an entry
1. ›Save name‹
2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
duration of approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being prompted
to do so by the system.
4. ›Save‹
Deleting an entry
1. ›Delete name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Deleting all entries
1. ›Delete phone book‹
The dialog for deleting the phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
3. Confirm the query again with ›Yes‹.
Reading and selecting entries
1. ›Read phone book‹
The dialog for reading the phone book is
opened.
2. Say ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry is
read.
Selecting an entry
1. ›Dial name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob during an announcement.
▷The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
page 246, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Seite 211
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Environmental conditions
▷Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷Keep the doors and windows closed to pre‐
vent noise interference.
▷Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Snap-in adapter*
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting the snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector of the mobile phone.
2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac‐
ing up in the direction of the electrical con‐
nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar‐
row 2 until it engages.
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Seite 212
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Telephone
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone numbers
can be dialed directly.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 24.
6. When equipped with a navigation system:
Enter the address. Only addresses con‐
tained in the navigation data in the vehicle
can be entered. This ensures that destina‐
tion guidance is possible for all addresses.
7. If necessary, "Store".
8. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying a contact as the home
address
A contact can be stored as the home address. It
is placed at the top of "My contacts".
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
My contacts
General information
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and mobile
phone.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. An
A-Z search is offered, refer to page 24, if there
are 30 or more contacts.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Seite 213
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone
Displaying the detailed view
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.
Selecting the name display
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored on
your mobile phone, the names may be displayed
differently than the display selected.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination*
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are used,
the address may need to be matched to the nav‐
igation data contained in the vehicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
Checking the address as a
destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers*
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"
4. Change the entries.
5. Move the controller to the left.
6. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the
changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A
copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only
this copy is displayed. Under certain circum‐
stances, a contact entry with the same name is
created.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐
not be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
Seite 214
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Contacts
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 33.
Seite 215
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
BMW Assist
BMW Assist*
General information
BMW Assist provides you with various services,
for instance, transmission of the position data of
your vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Cen‐
ter if an Emergency Request* is initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a
service center. After the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a service center after you sign a
new contract.
Requirements
▷The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in to a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit‐
ting the services.
▷To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
▷To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
▷The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your service center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling
must have been completed.
▷BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
▷Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
▷Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐
sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
▷Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
▷Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
tomer Relations for information on all as‐
pects of your vehicle.
▷TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit‐
ted to your service center, either automati‐
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
▷Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
ample, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
▷Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
mine its position.
▷In addition to these services, the optional
Convenience Plan offers a Concierge serv‐
ice and information for route planning, traf‐
fic, and weather. A limited number of calls
can be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
the mobile phone is not available or dis‐
charged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
▷You can also access the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service via the Internet.
Seite 216
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
BMW Assist
TeleService*
General information
TeleService supports communication with your
service center.
▷Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In
this way, the service center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
▷In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
▷The service varies by country.
▷Connection costs may ensue.
▷Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
▷BMW Assist is activated.
▷Wireless reception is available.
▷The engine is running.
Concierge service*
General information
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established with the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
Open the message via the message list, refer to
page 209.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
Seite 217
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
lished.
TeleService Help*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire‐
less transmission.
TeleService Help can be started after a prompt
by Roadside Assistance and the termination of
the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
Activating BMW Assist*
General information
If the services included in a Assist subscription
are not displayed, they may need to be activated.
Activating
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view of the
sky.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.
BMW Search*
At a glance
A business search can be opened via BMW
Search.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
▷The date setting, refer to page 80, on the
Control Display is current.
▷The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
work coverage.
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist"
Seite 218
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
BMW Assist
2. "BMW Search"
3. If necessary, "OK".
The BMW Search home page is displayed.
Using BMW Search
To start a search:
▷Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Service Request*
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re‐
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
Seite 219
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. "Start service"
Automatic Service Request*
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Services status*
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"
Activating BMW Assist
If the services included in a Assist subscription
are not displayed, they may need to be activated.
"Activate BMW Assist"
Activating TeleService
TeleService may need to be activated in the ve‐
hicle.
"Activate TeleService"
Deactivating TeleService
Even if the services of TeleService have been
deactivated, a voice connection to Roadside As‐
sistance is still possible.
"Deactivate TeleService"
Seite 220
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
BMW Assist
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Refueling
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket at‐
tached to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed prop‐
erly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐
bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.◀
Seite 224
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Refueling
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters
Refuel promptly
Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.◀
Seite 225
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Fuel
Fuel quality
Refuel with unleaded fuel only
Do not use leaded fuel as this would per‐
manently damage the catalytic converter.◀
Do not refuel with ethanol
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI
89
BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.
Gasoline with lower AKI
The minimum AKI Rating is 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine
damage may occur.◀
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differ‐
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐
ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in
the United States and Canada.
Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha‐
nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen
by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not
void the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drive‐
ability, starting and stalling problems especially
under certain environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in unscheduled maintenance.◀
Seite 226
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Fuel
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷The service life of the tires.
▷Road safety.
▷Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐
itialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐
itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 227, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
This information can be obtained from your
service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷Vehicle load.
▷Maximum allowable driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 227, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in psi/kPa
Specifications in psi/
kilopascal with cold
tires
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Seite 227
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in psi/kPa
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
245/50 R 18 100 Y
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
With partial load
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in psi/kPa
Specifications in psi/
kilopascal with cold
tires
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in psi/kPa
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
245/50 R 18 100 Y
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
With full load
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in psi/kPa
Specifications in psi/
kilopascal with cold
tires
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.5 / 36
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.8 / 41
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
245/50 R 18 100 Y
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.9 / 42 3.2 / 46
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Seite 228
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Wheels and tires
Tire identification marks
Tire size
255/50 R 19 103 Y
255: nominal width in mm
50: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
19: rim diameter in inches
103: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3508
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3508: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2008.
Recommendation: regardless of wear, replace
tires at least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Seite 229
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
sible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 232, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Seite 230
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Wheels and tires
Tire age
Recommendation
regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Manufacture date
On the sidewall:
DOT … 3508: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2008.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
Seite 231
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with damaged tires, refer to
page 96.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended.
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the same tire size:
▷245/50 R 18.
▷245/45 R 19.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to
the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Seite 232
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Wheels and tires
Snow chain detection*
The concept
When using snow chains, you should set
whether you are driving with or without snow
chains via the iDrive.
The snow chain detection system supports you
by automatically showing the detected state on
the Control Display.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐
ing of the Integral Active Steering* is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above the maximum allowable speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear
axle steering is activated again automatically.
Activating the status
1. "Settings"
2. "Tire chains"
3. "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection
If functioning properly:
▷Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
After you drive a short distance, the mes‐
sage is shown on the Control Display and the
status is activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
▷Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a warning
lamp lights up and a message is displayed.
Deactivate the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▷Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
A message does not appear on the Control
Display.
The automatic detection system is malfunc‐
tioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle
steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.
Seite 233
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1Vehicle identification number*
2Jump starting, negative terminal
3Washer fluid reservoir
4Jump starting, positive terminal
5Oil filler neck
6Coolant reservoir
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
1. Pull the lever.
Seite 234
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Engine compartment
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 235
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically and dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Requirements
▷The engine must be running and warm after
the vehicle has been driven for at least
6 miles/10 km.
▷The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.
Displaying the oil level
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
▷"Engine oil level OK"
▷"Measurement not possible at this time."
Duration with the engine running: ap‐
prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
▷"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
▷"Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀
▷"Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Note the newly calculated remaining mile‐
age until the next oil service. Have the sys‐
tem checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Recommended oil types, refer to page 236
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types
Note
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Seite 236
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Engine oil
Approved oil types
Your service center can advise you on which en‐
gine oils have been approved by the manufac‐
turer of your vehicle.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only use approved BMW High Performance oil.
Approved oils belong to the following viscosity
classes: SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40
and SAE 5W-30.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow‐
ing specification may be used.
API SM specifications or higher
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Coolant level
Have your service center check the coolant level
and add coolant, if necessary.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing
of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 237
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The system obtains information
about the road safety and opera‐
tional reliability of the vehicle and
takes into account aspects such
as a timely vehicle check. The aim
is to optimize maintenance pro‐
cedures with a view to reducing the cost of run‐
ning the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 82, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
your service center. Make sure to have regular
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐
ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐
sions.
Emissions values
▷The warning lamp lights up:
The emissions values are deterio‐
rating. Have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
▷The warning lamp flashes under cer‐
tain circumstances:
Seite 238
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Maintenance
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have
the system checked immediately;
otherwise, serious engine misfiring
within a brief period can seriously
damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Fuel filler cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you
signed a service contract for Assist, certain ve‐
hicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle
to facilitate the desired services.
Seite 239
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Replacing components
Tool kit
The tool kit is located in the rear compartment
in the trunk, refer to page 143.
Wiper blade replacement
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
page 72, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Lamp and bulb replacement
General information
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
your service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el‐
ements and other equipment.
Seite 240
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Replacing components
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the
light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐
rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses
do not need to be changed.
If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water
droplets form in the lamp, have it checked by
your service center.
Front lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1Adaptive light control
2Parking lamp, daytime running lights*
3Low beams/high beams
4Turn signal
Xenon headlamps*
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Turn signals, incl. side indicators
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 240.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Please contact your service center in the event
of a malfunction.
Adaptive light control
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 240.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
55-watt bulb, H3
1. Open the folding cover in the engine com‐
partment.
2. Turn the cap and remove it.
Seite 241
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Parking lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 240.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Please contact your service center in the event
of a malfunction.
Front fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 240.
35-watt bulb, H8
1. Carefully pull out the grill toward the front.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Pull the lamp out toward the front.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1Turn signal
2Backup lamp
3Rear fog lamp*
4Tail lamp
5Brake lamp
Turn signal, brake, tail, and license
plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 240.
These lights are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Seite 242
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Replacing components
Rear fog lamp and backup lamps in the
tailgateBackup lamps in the tailgate
Accessing the lamps
1. Remove the four screws using the screw
driver from the tool kit.
2. Pull down the cover with a firm tug.
3. Pull off the connector toward the left.
4. Replace the bulb.
Rear fog lamps
To change the rear fog lamp, contact your serv‐
ice center.
Backup lamp
16-watt bulb, W16W
Turn the bulb, pull it out, and replace it.
Changing wheels
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer
to page 232, as standard equipment.
They do not need to be replaced immediately in
the event of a puncture.
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety.
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Seite 243
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Lug bolt lock*
The lug bolt lock is found in the tool kit.
▷Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷Adapter, arrow 2.
Removing
1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt
back on.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only.
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
terminals, refer to page 247, in the engine com‐
partment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again, refer to page 57.
▷Time: update, refer to page 80.
▷Date: update, refer to page 80.
▷Radio station: Save again, refer to
page 174.
▷Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or take them to a recy‐
cling center.
Seite 244
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Replacing components
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the trunk.
In the glove compartment
Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,
arrow 2.
In the trunk
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 245
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Breakdown assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button for the hazard warning flashers is lo‐
cated in the center console.
Emergency Request*
Requirements
▷Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 218.
▷The radio ready state is switched on.
▷The BMW Assist system is functional and
logged into a wireless communications net‐
work.
▷The emergency call system is functional.
Only use Emergency Request in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.◀
Service contract
▷After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷The system can be reactivated by a service
center after you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
tablished.
After the Emergency Request arrives at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
Assist Response Center contacts you and
takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center.
▷If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
Seite 246
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Breakdown assistance
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the button.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located on the left in the
trunk.
Release the Velcro® fastener to remove it.
First aid kit*
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
ment on the right side in the trunk.
Fold up the cover to remove it.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any items promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance from the BMW Group pro‐
vides around-the-clock assistance in the event
of a breakdown, including on weekends and hol‐
idays.
Phone numbers of the Response Center of
Roadside Assistance in your home country: re‐
fer to the Contact brochure.
Jump starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacity in Ah. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Seite 247
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Connect the jumper cables in the correct order;
otherwise, there is the danger of injury from
sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
hicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the other vehicle as usual.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the tool
kit under the trunk floor.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Seite 248
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Breakdown assistance
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the arrow
symbol.
Towing
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
Do not tow when the electronics system
has failed.
Do not tow the vehicle when the electronics sys‐
tem has failed; otherwise, the electric steering
lock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot
be steered.◀
Observe before towing
Vehicle without manual parking lock*:
Transport the vehicle on a loading plat‐
form only.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual
parking lock*, it may not be towed.
Have the vehicle transported on a loading plat‐
form only or the vehicle can be damaged.◀
Vehicle with manual parking lock*:
Manually release the transmission lock
Manually release the transmission lock, even if
there is no malfunction involving the transmis‐
sion. Otherwise, there is the danger that the
transmission lock will be engaged automatically
during towing.◀
Towing*
Observe the notes on towing
Observe all notes on towing or vehicle
damage or accidents can occur.◀
▷Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
▷Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
raised, as the front wheels could turn.
▷When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and steer‐
ing.
▷Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Adhere to the towing speed and distance
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/
50 km/h and a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km
or damage to the transmission can occur.◀
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
Seite 249
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐
nering.
▷The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow truck
Vehicle without manual parking lock*:
Have vehicles transported on a loading
platform only.
Do not tow the vehicle with the front or rear axle
lifted individually or the vehicle can be dam‐
aged.◀
Do not lift the vehicle.
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Secure the vehicle against rolling off.
Apply the parking brake after towing and
secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces‐
sary.
Have the operability of transmission position P
checked by the service center.◀
Vehicle with manual parking lock*:
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle.
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Secure the vehicle against rolling off.
Apply the parking brake after towing and
secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces‐
sary.
Have the operability of transmission position P
checked by the service center.◀
Tow-starting
Note
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Seite 250
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Breakdown assistance
Care
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/
60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control*, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/
30 cm.◀
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
hicle.
Washing in automatic car washes
Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car
washes right from the start.
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Notes
Note the following:
▷Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle.
▷Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 71, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll when the following
steps are taken:
1. Press on the brake pedal.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake, refer to
page 67, or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer
to page 69.
4. Switch the engine off.
Transmission position P with the igni‐
tion off
When the ignition is switched off, position P
is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐
matic car wash, for example, ensure that the
ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N.
A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
lock the vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷When the ignition is switched off.
▷After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Seite 251
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention.
Environmental influences can act on the vehicle
paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car
care to these influences.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Chrome surfaces*
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts*
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Seite 252
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Care
Plastic components
These include:
▷Headliner.
▷Lamp lenses.
▷Instrument cluster cover.
▷Matte black spray-coated components.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic
cleanser, if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats*
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
compartment for cleaning.
If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth
and water or an interior cleaner. To prevent mat‐
ting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the di‐
rection of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean the sensors or cameras of equipment
such as the High-beam Assistant*, Active
Cruise Control* or Night Vision*, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Use a microfiber cloth to clean the Control Dis‐
play or the Head-up Display*.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 253
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Technical data
Dimensions
Width with mirrors, height with roof-mounted aerial
Width without mirrors
Seite 256
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Technical data
Length, wheel base
Smallest turning circle
Ø: 40 ft/12.2 m Engine specifications
The rated power outputs are established on the
basis of fuel grade AKI 91.
535i
Displacement cu in/cm³ 181.8/2,979
No. of cylinders 6
Maximum output
at engine speed
hp
rpm
300
5,800-6,250
Maximum torque
at engine speed
lb ft/Nm
rpm
300/407
1,200-5,000
550i
Displacement cu in/cm³ 268.2/4,395
No. of cylinders 8
Seite 257
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
550i
Maximum output
at engine speed
hp
rpm
400
5,500-6,400
Maximum torque
at engine speed
lb ft/Nm
rpm
450/610
1,750-4,500
Weights
535i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,667/2,570
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,580/1,170
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,263/1,480
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
550i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,954/2,700
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,811/1,275
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,308/1,500
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer
to page 226
Windshield and headlamp
washer system
US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0
Seite 258
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Technical data
Short commands for voice activation
system
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
Useful short commands
Function Command
Owner's Manual ›Owner's Manual‹
Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹
Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹
Opening the settings ›Settings‹
Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹
Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹
Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹
Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹
Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹
Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹
CD/multimedia*
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Playing back a CD ›C D on‹
Selecting a CD ›Select C D‹
Selecting a CD and track ›C D ... track ... ‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track ›C D track ... ‹ e.g., track 5
Opening the CD and multimedia menu ›C D and multimedia‹
Seite 259
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Function Command
CD and DVD ›C D‹
Displaying entertainment details on the split screen ›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Calling up the current playback ›Current playback‹
Opening the music collection ›Music collection‹
Playing the music collection ›Music collection on‹
Searching for music; opening the menu ›Music search‹
Playing back the most frequently played tracks ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Opening external devices ›External devices‹
Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹
AUX front ›AUX front‹
Tone
Function Command
Opening the tone settings ›Tone‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Calling up the radio ›Radio‹
Calling up an FM station ›F M‹
Opening manual search ›Manual‹
Seite 260
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Short commands for voice activation system
Function Command
Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,
93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Selecting the frequency range ›Select frequency‹
AM
Function Command
Calling up an AM station ›A M‹
Opening manual search ›Manual‹
Calling up a frequency ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐
quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Weather Band
Function Command
Calling up the Weather Band ›Weather band‹
Switching on the Weather Band ›Weather band on‹
Selecting a Weather Band station ›Select a weather channel‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio ›Satellite radio‹
Switching on the satellite radio ›Satellite radio on‹
Selecting a satellite radio channel ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite
radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Opening the stored stations ›Presets‹
Choosing a stored station ›Select preset‹
Selecting a stored station ›Preset ... ‹ e.g., stored station 2
Seite 261
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Telephone*
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu ›Telephone‹
Displaying the phone book ›Phonebook‹
Redialing ›Redial‹
Displaying accepted calls ›Received calls‹
Dialing a phone number ›Dial number‹
List of messages ›Messages‹
Call up Bluetooth devices ›Bluetooth‹
Navigation*
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu ›Navigation‹
Opening the destination input ›Enter address‹
Entering the address ›Enter address‹
Opening destination guidance ›Guidance‹
Starting destination guidance ›Start guidance‹
Terminating destination guidance ›Stop guidance‹
Opening the home address ›Home address‹
Opening the route criteria ›Route preference‹
Opening the route ›Route information‹
Switching on the spoken instructions ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeating a spoken instruction ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switching off the spoken instructions ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Displaying the address book ›Address book‹
Displaying the last destinations ›Last destinations‹
Opening the traffic bulletins ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations ›Points of interest‹
Seite 262
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Short commands for voice activation system
Map
Function Command
Displaying the map ›Map‹
Map facing north ›Map facing north‹
Map in the direction of travel ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...miles ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale
5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switching off the split screen ›Turn off split screen‹
Adapting the split screen ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position ›Split screen current position‹
Split screen, direction of travel ›Split screen map in direction of
travel‹
Split screen, perspective ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, wider intersection zoom ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...miles ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Automatically scaling the split screen ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Seite 263
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
New destination entry ›Enter address‹
Trip list ›Stored trips‹
Contacts*
Function Command
My contacts ›My contacts‹
Opening the contacts ›Contacts‹
New contact ›New contact‹
BMW Assist*
Function Command
Opening BMW Assist ›B M W Assist‹
Opening BMW Search ›B M W Search‹
Vehicle information
Owner's Manual
Function Command
Opening the Owner's Manual ›Display Owner's Manual‹
Opening the Quick Reference ›Quick reference‹
Opening the keyword search ›Owner's Manual‹
Opening Search by pictures ›Search by pictures‹
Computer
Function Command
Opening the computer ›Onboard info‹
Opening the trip computer ›Trip computer‹
Seite 264
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Short commands for voice activation system
Vehicle
Function Command
Opening the vehicle information ›Vehicle info‹
Opening the vehicle status ›Vehicle status‹
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Opening the main menu ›Main menu‹
Opening the settings ›Settings‹
Opening the options ›Options‹
Info display of the instrument cluster ›Info Display‹
Central display settings ›Control display‹
Opening the time and date settings ›Time and date‹
Opening the language and unit settings ›Language and units‹
Opening the speed limit settings ›Speed‹
Opening the light settings ›Lighting‹
Opening the door lock settings ›Door locks‹
Opening the profiles ›Profiles‹
Equipment*
Function Command
Opening the air conditioning settings ›Climate‹
Opening the Head-up Display settings ›head up display‹
Enabling the rear seat ›Allow rear control‹
Seite 265
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 101
ACC Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 107
Accessories and parts 7
Activated-charcoal filter 130
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 98
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 107
Active seat, front 50
Active seat ventilation,
front 51
Active seat ventilation,
rear 53
Active Steering, integral 102
Adaptive brake assistant 101
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 100
Adaptive light control 87
Adaptive light control, bulb re‐
placement 241
Additives, oil 236
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 48
After washing vehicle 252
Airbags 90
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 129
Air distribution, manual 128
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 130
Air pressure, tires 227
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 131
Air volume, automatic climate
control 129
Alarm system 42
Alarm, unintentional 43
All around the center con‐
sole 17
All around the headliner 18
All around the steering
wheel 12
ALL program, automatic cli‐
mate control 130
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 231
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 135
Alternative oil types 236
AM/FM station 174
Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc‐
tions 163
Antifreeze, washer fluid 72
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 101
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 101
Approved engine oils 236
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 141
Ashtray 136
Assist 216
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 247
Assistance when driving
off 106
Audio playback 181
AUTO intensity 129
Automatic car wash 251
Automatic climate con‐
trol 128
Automatic Cruise Control with
Stop & Go 107
Automatic Curb Monitor 59
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 91
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 87
Automatic Hold 68
Automatic locking 38
Automatic recirculated-air
control 129
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 38
Automatic Soft Closing, tail‐
gate 39
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 72
Automatic trunk lid 39
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 129
AUTO program, intensity 129
AUX-IN port 192
Axle loads, weights 258
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 50
Backrest, seats 48
Backrest width 50
Back seats, adjusting 51
Backup camera 120
Backup lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 243
Balance 172
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 247
Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 249
Basic position, rear seats 53
Bass 172
Battery replacement, remote
control, rear entertain‐
ment 197
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 244
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 32
Battery, vehicle 244
Before entering the car
wash 251
Belts, safety belts 53
Seite 266
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Everything from A to Z
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 142
Blinds, sun protection 45
Bluetooth connection, activat‐
ing/deactivating 205
BMW Assist 216
BMW EfficientDynamics, refer
to Saving fuel 150
BMW homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem 238
BMW Search 218
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 142
Brake assistant 101
Brake assistant, adaptive 101
Brake discs, breaking in 146
Brake force display 100
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 100
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 242
Brake lights, adaptive 100
Brake pads, breaking in 146
Braking, notes 147
Breakdown assis‐
tance 246, 247
Breaking in 146
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 81
Bulb replacement 240
Bulb replacement, front 241
Bulb replacement, rear 242
Bulbs and lamps 240
Button, Start/Stop 65
Bypassing, see starting
aid 247
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, backup camera 122
Camera, care 253
Camera, Side View 123
Camera, Top View 120
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 142
Car battery 244
Car care products 252
Care, vehicle 252
Cargo 148
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 149
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 32
Carpet, care 253
Car wash 251
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 146
Category details, special des‐
tinations 157
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 238
CD/DVD 181
CD/DVD player, rear 196
CDs, storing 187
Cell phone 204
Center armrest 141
Center console 17
Central locking system 35
Central screen, refer to Control
Display 19
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 6
Changing parts 240
Changing wheels/tires 231
Check Control 83
Children, seating position 61
Children, transporting
safely 61
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 61
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 62
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 61
Child-safety locks 64
Child seat, mounting 61
Child seats 61
Chrome parts, care 252
Cigarette lighter 136
Climate control 128
Climate control wind‐
shield 147
Clock 76
Closing/opening from in‐
side 38
Closing/opening via door
lock 37
Closing/opening with remote
control 35
Clothes hooks 142
Collision warning, iBrake 112
Combination instrument 14
Combination instrument, elec‐
tronic displays 16
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 70
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 70
Comfort Access 41
COMFORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 105
Computer 78
Concierge service 217
Condensation on win‐
dows 129
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 148
Condition Based Service
CBS 238
Confirmation signal 37
Contacts 213
Control Display 19
Control Display, care 253
Control Display, settings 80
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 101
Convenient opening 36
Convenient operation 37
Coolant 237
Coolant temperature 76
Cooling function 130
Cooling, maximum 129
Cooling system 237
Corrosion on brake discs 148
Cruise control 114
Cruise control, active with
stop-and-go 107
Seite 267
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Cruising range 77
Cupholder 142
Curb weight 258
Current fuel consumption 76
Current location, storing 156
Customer Relations 219
D
Damage, tires 230
Damping Control, dy‐
namic 102
Data, technical 256
Date 76
Daytime running lights 87
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 129
Destination guidance 161
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 160
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 154
Detour, selecting 167
Digital clock 76
Digital radio 175
Dimensions 256
Dimmable mirrors 59
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 70
Displacement, engine 257
Display, instrument clus‐
ter 75
Display in windshield 126
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ment lighting 89
Displays 14
Displays, care 253
Disposal, coolant 237
Disposal, vehicle battery 244
Distance control, refer to
PDC 115
Distance, selecting for
ACC 108
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 32
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 38
Drive-off assistant 106
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 101
Driving instructions, breaking
in 146
Driving notes, general 146
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 101
Driving tips 146
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 101
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 101
DVD/CD 181
DVD/CD notes 186
DVD/CD player, rear 196
DVD changer 185
DVD settings 184
DVDs, storing 187
DVD, video 183
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 102
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 162
Dynamic Drive 102
Dynamic Driving Control 103
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 101
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 101
E
EfficientDynamics, refer to
Saving fuel 150
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 16
Electronic engine oil level
check 236
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 101
Emergency detection, remote
control 33
Emergency release, door
lock 38
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 224
Emergency release, parking
brake 67
Emergency Request 246
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 247
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 33
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 41
Energy Control 76
Energy regeneration 77
Engine compartment 234
Engine compartment, working
in 234
Engine coolant 237
Engine oil 236
Engine oil, adding 236
Engine oil additives 236
Engine oil filler neck 236
Engine oil temperature 76
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 236
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 236
Engine specifications 257
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 33
Engine start, Help 247
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 65
Engine stop 66
Engine temperature 76
Equalizer 172
Equipment, interior 134
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 101
Exchanging wheels/tires 231
Exhaust system 146
Exterior mirrors 58
External devices 192
External start 247
External temperature dis‐
play 75
External temperature warn‐
ing 75
Eyes for securing cargo 149
Seite 268
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Everything from A to Z
F
Fader 172
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 83
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 43
Fan, refer to Air volume 129
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 83
Filler neck for engine oil 236
Fine wood, care 252
First aid kit 247
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow
fitting 248
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92
Flat tire, warning lamp 93, 96
Flat tire, wheel change 243
Flooding 147
Floor carpet, care 253
Floor mats, care 253
FM/AM station 174
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 72
Foot brake 147
Front airbags 90
Front fog lamps 89
Front fog lamps, front, bulb re‐
placement 242
Front lamps 241
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 91
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 92
Front seats, adjusting 48
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 95
Fuel cap 224
Fuel consumption, current 76
Fuel filler flap 224
Fuel gauge 77
Fuel quality 226
Fuel, tank capacity 258
Fuse 245
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 134
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 163
Gear change, automatic trans‐
mission 73
General driving notes 146
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 45
Glove compartment 140
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐
gation system 154
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 258
Gross weight, permissible for
trailer towing 258
H
Hand brake, refer to Parking
brake 66
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 135
Hazard warning flashers 246
HD Radio 175
Head airbags 90
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 87
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 86
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 36
Headlamp flasher 70
Headlamp glass 241
Headlamps 241
Headlamps, care 251
Headlamp washer system 70
Headliner 18
Headphones, rear entertain‐
ment 199
Head restraints 48
Head restraints, front 55
Head restraints, rear 56
Head-up Display 126
Head-up Display, care 253
Heavy cargo, stowing 149
Height, seats 48
Height with roof-mounted aer‐
ial, vehicle 256
High-beam assistant 88
High beams 70
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam assistant 88
Hills 147
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 106
Holder for beverages 142
Homepage 6
Hood 234
Horn 12
Hotel function, tailgate 41
Hot exhaust system 146
House number, entering for
navigation 155
HUD, Head-up Display 126
Hydroplaning 147
I
iBrake, collision warning 112
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 75
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 75
Identification marks, tires 229
Identification number, refer to
Engine compartment 234
iDrive 19
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 32
Ignition off 65
Ignition on 65
Indication of a flat tire 93, 96
Indicator and warning mes‐
sages 14
Indicator lamps 14
Individual air distribution 128
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 33
Inflation pressure monitor,
tires 92
Inflation pressure, tires 227
Seite 269
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 95
Info display 75
Information on navigation
data 167
Initialization, Integral Active
Steering 102
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 95
Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 93
Instrument cluster 14, 75
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 16
Instrument lighting 89
Integral Active Steering 102
Integrated key 32
Integrated universal remote
control 134
Intensity, AUTO program 129
Interactive map 159
Interior equipment 134
Interior lamps 89
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 36
Interior motion sensor 43
Interior rearview and exterior
mirrors, automatic dimming
feature 59
Interior rearview mirror 59
Intermediate destina‐
tions 160
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 155
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 82
iPod/iPhone 193
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 244
Jack, refer to Vehicle
jack 244
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 73
K
Key/remote control 32
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 41
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 33
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 73
Knee airbag 90
L
Lamp replacement 240
Lamp replacement, front 241
Lamp replacement, rear 242
Lamps 86
Lamps and bulbs 240
Lane departure warning 97
Lane margin, warning 97
Language on Control Dis‐
play 81
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 149
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 62
Leather, care 252
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 240
Length, vehicle 257
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 24
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 242
Light-alloy wheels, care 252
Light control 87
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 240
Lighter, front 136
Lighting 86
Lighting via remote con‐
trol 36
Light switch 86
Load 149
Loading 148
Loading position 139
Lock, door 37
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 38
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 37
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 35
Locking, automatic 38
Locking, central 35
Locking via tailgate 39
Lock, power window 45
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 64
Low beams 86
Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam assistant 88
Lower back support 50
Lug bolt lock 244
Luggage compartment lid 38
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 149
Lumbar support 50
M
Maintenance 238
Maintenance require‐
ments 238
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 82
Maintenance system,
BMW 238
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 83
Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐
pension 103
Manual air distribution 128
Manual air volume 129
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 66
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 73
Manual operation, backup
camera 120
Manual operation, door
lock 38
Manual operation, exterior mir‐
rors 58
Seite 270
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Everything from A to Z
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 224
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 116
Manual operation, parking
brake 67
Manual operation, Side
View 122
Manual operation, Top
View 119
Map, destination entry 158
Map in split screen 164
Map view 164
Marking on approved
tires 231
Marking, run-flat tires 232
Massage seat, front 50
Master key, refer to Remote
control 32
Maximum cooling 129
Maximum speed, display 84
Maximum speed, winter
tires 231
Measure, units of 81
Medical kit 247
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 57
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 77
Menus, operating, iDrive 19
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 20
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 165
Microfilter 130
Minimum tread, tires 230
Mirror 58
Mirror memory 57
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 147
Mobile phone 204
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 6
Moisture in headlamp 241
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 61
MP3 player 192
Multi-function hook 143
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12
Multimedia 181
Music collection 187
Music search 189
Music, storing 187
N
Navigation 154
Navigation data 167
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 55
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 56
New wheels and tires 231
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection 123
NORMAL program, Dynamic
Driving Control 105
Notes 6
Number of cylinders, en‐
gine 257
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 250
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 238
Obstacle marking, backup
camera 121
Odometer 75
Oil 236
Oil, adding 236
Oil additives 236
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 82
Oil filler neck 236
Oil level check 236
Oil types, alternative 236
Oil types, approved 236
Old batteries, disposal 244
Onboard computer, refer to
Computer 78
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 238
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 19
Opening/closing from in‐
side 38
Opening/closing via door
lock 37
Opening/closing with remote
control 35
Operating concept, iDrive 19
Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 129
Outside temperature warn‐
ing 75
Overheating of engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 76
P
Paint, vehicle 252
Pairing, mobile phone 204
Panic mode 36
Panoramic glass sunroof 45
Park Distance Control
PDC 115
Parked-car ventilation 133
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 148
Parking aid, refer to PDC 115
Parking brake 66
Parking lamps 86
Parking lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 242
Parking with Auto Hold 68
Parts and accessories 7
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 59
Pathway lines, backup cam‐
era 120
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 115
Pedestrian detection, refer to
Night Vision 123
People detection, refer to
Night Vision 123
Permissible axle load 258
Personal Profile 33
Seite 271
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 46
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 44
Plastic, care 253
Position, storing 156
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 155
Power failure 244
Power output, engine 257
Power windows 44
Pressure monitor, tires 92
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 227
Pressure warning, tires 95
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 33
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 23
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 46
Protective function, win‐
dows 44
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 19
R
Radiator fluid 237
Radio 174
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 32
Radio ready state 65
Rain sensor 71
Random 182
Random playback 182
RDS 175
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 132
Rear axle steering 102
Rear entertainment 196
Rear fog lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 243
Rear lamps 242
Rear seats, adjusting 51
Rear seats, basic position 53
Rear sockets 137
Rearview mirror 58
Rear window defroster 130
Recirculated-air mode 129
Recommended tire
brands 231
Refueling 224
Release tool 240
Remaining range 77
Remote control/key 32
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 37
Remote control, rear enter‐
tainment 197
Remote control, univer‐
sal 134
Replacement fuse 245
Replacing parts 240
Replacing wheels/tires 231
Reporting safety defects 8
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 77
Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 93
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 130
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 149
Retreaded tires 231
Road, avoiding 162
Road detour 162
Roadside Assistance 217
Roadside parking lamps 87
Roller sunblinds 45
Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐
namic Drive 102
Roof load capacity 258
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 149
Rope for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 250
Route 162
Route criteria, route 162
Route, displaying 162
Route section, bypassing 163
RPM, engine 257
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 232
Rubber components,
care 252
Run-flat tires 232
Run-flat tires, flat tire 93, 96
S
Safe braking 147
Safety 6
Safety belt reminder 54
Safety belts 53
Safety belts, care 253
Safety switch, windows 45
Safety systems, airbags 90
Satellite radio 176
Saving fuel 150
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 164
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Screw driver 240
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 249
Search, refer to BMW
Search 218
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 53
Seat heating, front 50
Seat heating, rear 53
Seating position for chil‐
dren 61
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 57
Seats 48
Seats, rear, adjusting 51
Seat ventilation, front 51
Seat ventilation, rear 53
Selection list in instrument
cluster 77
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 73
Self-leveling suspension, air
suspension 103
Self-leveling suspension, mal‐
function 103
Sensors, care 253
Service and warranty 7
Seite 272
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Everything from A to Z
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Serv‐
ice 238
Service requirements, dis‐
play 82
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 247
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 80
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 57
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 72
Short commands 259
Shoulder support 50
Side airbags 90
Side View 122
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 37
Sitting safely 48
Size 256
Ski and snowboard bag 139
Slide/tilt glass roof 45
Smallest turning circle 257
Smoker's package 136
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 212
Snow chains 232
Socket 136
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 238
Spare fuse 245
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 157
Specified oil types 236
Speed limit detection 84
Speed limit, setting 78
Speedometer 14
Split screen 23
Split screen map set‐
tings 164
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 163
SPORT+ program, Dynamic
Driving Control 104
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 104
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 73
Stability control systems 101
Start/Stop button 65
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 33
Starting aid 247
Starting the engine 65
State/province, selecting for
navigation 154
Stations, stored 180
Station, storing 174
Status display, tires 93
Status information, iDrive 22
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 102
Steering wheel, adjusting 59
Steering wheel heating 60
Steering wheel memory 57
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 72
Stopping the engine 66
Storage compartment in the
center console 142
Storage compartments 140
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 140
Storage, tires 232
Storing the vehicle 253
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 155
Summer tires, tread 230
Surround View 118
Suspension settings 103
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 103
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 133
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 76
Tail and brake lamps 242
Tailgate 38
Tailgate, automatic 39
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Tailgate, hotel function 41
Tailgate via remote control 36
Tail lamps 242
Tail lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 242
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 6
Technical data 256
Telephone 204
TeleService 217
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 129
Temperature display, external
temperature 75
Temperature, engine oil 76
Terminal 0 65
Terminal 15 65
Terminal R 65
Terminal, starting aid 247
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 42
Theft protection, lug
bolts 244
Theft protection, refer to Cen‐
tral locking system 35
Thermal camera, refer to Night
Vision 123
Thigh support 48
Through-loading system 137
Tilt alarm sensor 43
Tilt, seats 48
Tire age 231
Tire damage 230
Tire identification marks 229
Tire inflation pressure 227
Tire inflation pressure monitor,
refer to FTM 95
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92
Tires, changing 231
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 227
Tires, flat tire 244
Tires, run-flat tires 232
Tire tread 230
Toll roads, route 162
Seite 273
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Tone 172
Tool kit 240
Tools 240
Top View 118
Torque, engine 257
Total vehicle weight 258
Tow fitting 248
Towing 248
Town/city, navigation 154
Tow-starting 248
Tow truck 250
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 92
Traction control 101
TRACTION program, Dynamic
Driving Control 104
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 165
Traffic obstruction, bypass‐
ing 167
Traffic situation/gray
card 166
Transmission, automatic 72
Transporting children
safely 61
Tread, tires 230
Treble, tone 172
Trip computer 79
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 70
Trip odometer 75
Truck for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 250
Trunk 137
Trunk cover 137
Trunk, expanding 137
Trunk lid 38
Trunk lid, automatic 39
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Trunk lid, hotel function 41
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 36
Trunk partition 138
Trunk, storage compart‐
ments 143
Turning circle 257
Turning circle lines, backup
camera 121
Turn signals, front, bulb re‐
placement 241
Turn signals, operation 70
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 242
U
Unintentional alarm 43
Units of measure 81
Universal remote control 134
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 73
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 38
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 37
Unlocking/locking with remote
control 35
Upholstery care 252
USB audio interface 193
USB interface 140
V
Variable Damping Control, re‐
fer to Dynamic Damping
Control 102
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 102
Vehicle battery 244
Vehicle battery, replacing 244
Vehicle, breaking in 146
Vehicle care 252
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number
in the engine compart‐
ment 234
Vehicle jack 244
Vehicle paint 252
Vehicle storage 253
Vehicle wash 251
Ventilation 131
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 133
Version of navigation
data 167
Video playback 183
Voice activation, mobile
phone 210
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 259
Voice activation system 25
Volume, setting 172
W
Warning lamps 14
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 83
Warning triangle 247
Washer fluid 72
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 258
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 71
Washer system 70
Washing, vehicle 251
Water on roads 147
Weather Band 175
Weights 258
Welcome lamps 86
Wheel base, vehicle 257
Wheel change 243
Wheels, changing 231
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 227
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 95
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92
Width with mirrors, vehi‐
cle 256
Width without mirrors, vehi‐
cle 256
Window defroster, rear 130
Windows, powered 44
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 147
Windshield washer fluid 72
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 71
Seite 274
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Everything from A to Z
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 70
Windshield wiper 70
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 72
Winter storage, care 253
Winter tires, suitable
tires 231
Winter tires, tread 230
Wiper blades, replacing 240
Wiper fluid 72
Wiper system 70
Wood, care 252
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench 240
X
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 241
Y
Your individual vehicle 6
Seite 275
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 41 2 604 413 ue
*BL260441300K*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 413 - 03 10 500
